Home

TM 11-5820-890-10-8 Operators manual, SINCGARS

Contents

1. 11 5820 890 10 8 COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS SECTION INTRODUCTION SCOPE This appendix lists components of end item for Radio Sets AN PRC 119A D F and AN VRC 87A D F thru AN VRC 92A D F and AN VRC 87C to help you inventory items required for safe and efficient operation 2 GENERAL The Components of End Item List is found at Section II This listing is for informational purposes only and is not authority to requisition replacements These items are part of the end item but are removed and separately packaged for transportation or shipment As part of the end item these items must be with the end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts The list is divided into sublistings for each radio set Illustrations are furnished to assist you in identifying the items 3 EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS The following explains the columns found in the tabular listings a Column 1 Illustration Number Illus No This column indicates the number of the illustration showing the item b Column 2 National Stock Number This column indicates the national stock number assigned to the item and will be used for requisitioning purposes c Column 3 Description This column indicates the federal item name and if required a minimum description to ident
2. 5 3 Operator Controls 5 5 Primary Operator Preparation 5 28 Special Operator Tasks 5 42 5 6 Special Operator Tasks 5 62 Other Operator 5 64 6 NET CONTROL STATION NCS 5 5 6 1 General RO TTC 6 2 NCS Responsibilities 6 3 Primary NCS Tasks iis22hee ie Special NCS Tasks 222 nardousddurdueddiuadoeredarinaiiuadonbson 6 18 SINCGARS ASSOCIATED TASKS 7 1 General Na C A 7 2 Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver Tasks 2 8 Secure Telephone Unit STU 7 11 Frequency Hopping Multiplexer FHMUX 7 17 la OPERATOR MAINTENANCE SINCGARS Radio Maintenance 8 1 Associated Equipment 8 13 Battery Requirements _ 8 25 11 5820 890 10 8 HOW TO USE YOUR MANUAL COVER Information that you will use most often is boxed on the rear cover as well as in the Table of Contents The boxed information found on the rear cover is thumb indexed with ed
3. Jamming anti jamming actions Late net entry LNE passive method Load COMSEC FH data sync time into RT using ICOM fill procedure task Load date and Zulu time into SINCGARS Receiver Transmitter RT task Load Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR key from ANCD into PLOR Load single channel frequencies into Receiver Transmitter RT task Loading and clearing offset frequencies ee AME EIS ae ae Long manpack antenna Long Range Long Range LR LR Radio components Long Range LR Radio components Loudspeake 15 671 Components Operator controls Operator maintenance Performance data Phy icalda t d a Maintenance forms records reports Manpack Antenna Components General ne bela eee ae ere ew ne
4. You may select Loadset Eset Key or Time The item selected for transfer to the Target ANCD must be the same as that selected for the Source ANCD MWOD multiple word of day is a term used loading procedure for Have Quick radios found in selected aircraft radios Do not press SEND until ready to press RCV Then press RCV within 20 seconds of pressing SEND This screen will appear only if the data item name exists the Target ANCD 11 5820 890 10 8 6 34 Transfer COMSEC Key From ANCD to RT NCS Option 1 DESCRIPTION This optional task enables an NCS to transfer COMSEC keys from an ANCD to a SINCGARS radio It is a variation of Primary NCS Task 1 Although the flowchart below shows the detailed procedure for transfer of a COMSEC key to an RT this procedure can also be used to transfer COMSEC keys from an ANCD to a KYK 13 or KYX 15 if desired DETAILED FLOWCHART TRANSFER COMSEC KEY FROM ANCD TO RT SUBTASK ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare ANCD for transfer Turn ANCD ON select of COMSEC key Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 1 2 3 4 Enter COMSEC vG Ld Mk vU Enter LD select Tek Kek 5 Enter TEK or KEK as Select key quit desired name number ENTR 6 Select key and press ENTR Select key qUit key selected _ XMT 7 Enter QUIT Cannect ANCD to RT
5. 6 10 Electronic Remote Fill procecure for FH data Equipment improvement recommendations 1 3 Frequency hopping FH communications 4 6 o Senso ei bet 4 9 Capabilities 4 6 ee 4 6 4 7 Frequency Hopping Multiplexer FHMUX imin inan imin in Gu qb d 3 5 COMMDONEMNS costosa dar user A ed ad d e 3 5 Performancedata 3 6 Physicaldat 3 5 Operator mantenata 25 0 5 2 992 202 208 eon ee ee con SUR aos eee 8 23 i ee ae 7 17 General information 1 2 Hand receipt CHR manuals eitis 1 3 Handheld Remote Control Radio Device 3 12 AHRCRD gereret ERE RUNE SUBE BEBE 3 13 Operator Maintenance x ves ea rex eee bees 8 24 Hot Start net opening procedure 4 16 Option for late net entty e I nnn 4 19 ICOM Fill of Receiver Transmitter RT 4 15 Integrated Communications Security ICOM 4 2 Index 2 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT Julian Date and GPS Zulu Time
6. 9 9 55 ALONG DOTTED LINE 22 NNA PUBLICATION NUMBER TM 11 5820 890 10 8 BE EXACT PIN POINT WHERE IT 1 FIGURE NO 3 SSG 1 DeSpiritof DA 2028 2 DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM CAREFULLY TEAR IT OUT FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL HEULUMMENDED CHANGES 10 EQUIPMENI IECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS SOMETHING WRONG WITH THIS PUBLICATION FROM PRINT YOUR UNIT S COMPLETE ADDRESS ommandaer Stateside Army Depot ATTN AMSTA US Stateside N J 07703 5007 DATE SENT 10 July 1975 PUBLICATION DATE PUBLICATION TITLE 23 Jan 74 Radar Set AN PRC 76 IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT Recommend that the installation antenna alignment procedure be changed throughout to specify a 2 IFF antenna lag rather than 1 REASON Experience has shown that with only a 1 lag the antenna servo system is too gapsitive to wind gusting in excess of 25 knots as a tendency to adjusting the lag to 2 operation Item 5 Functiog REASON FAULT in mn Change 2 dB to 3 ent procedure for the TRANS POWER F calls for 3 dB 500 watts adjustment POWER FAULT indicator m SON To replace the cover plate Pone C 3 On J1 2 change 24 VDC to 5 REASON This is the outpu
7. For Control Moniotor For Remote Control Unit For SINCGARS radios uw ERE ER EE PE eeu Primary Net Control Station NCS tasks ont tice med beaded eee Primary operator preparation tasks becdebbasccadarse med ene Alen TT Purpose of manual Radios OR Radios vehicular exe Ged eee xe Receive and store Traffic Encryption Key TEK sent by MK method of OTAR Receive COMSEC key FH data into ANCD via STU task Receive net update ERF Electronic Remote Fill from Net Control Station task suru E Receive SOI information into ANCD via Secure Telephone Unit STUY ASK arts PLUS Receiver characteristics 55458 Receiver Transmitter RT Operator ConirolS 13799 9a 11 993 ELEI EENE C 3 4 Index 5 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Reloading sync t
8. Physical data Hold up battery HUB requirements Main power battery requirements Manually load date and Zulu time into Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR task cT Net Control Station Responsibilities Gad sown thn ck dade EAE quaa Tasks General PAGE Index 3 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Netmanagement 4 46 Disciplino e 4 46 Mobile Subscriber Equipment MSE compatibility 4 48 Operator proficiency 4 48 Role of Alternate NCS Role of the NCS Role of Signal Officers NCOS Special task performance 6 4 48 Net opening general e Hot Start procedure Obtain date and GPS Zulu time from Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver task e 7 4 Obtain SOI information from Automated Net Control Device ANCD task 5 37 amp cgoMPC Pen 5 5 5 5 Maintenance 8 1 Tasks general REN 5 2 UENIT 5 13 Troubleshooting guides e 8 7 Over The Air Reke
9. Secure communications 4 2 Secure Telephone Unit STU 3 8 Capabilities ees 3 8 Characteristics 3 8 Definition of tasks aree a tia Physicaldata 3 9 Summary of tasks 7 11 TETUR 7 11 Security classification and marking T IT 1 3 Select RT preparation settings from MENU 5 29 Index 8 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Send COMSEC Key FH data from ANCD to ANCD via STU task 7 12 Send data via RS 232 mode usus ss sss eese 5 63 Send Electronic Remote Fill as part of retransmission RXMT operation task MC 5 58 Send SOI information ANCD to ANCD Secure Telephone Unit Send Traffic Encryption Key to net operators using AK method of OTAR 6 26 Send Traffic Encryption Key to other NCSs using MK method of OTAR fask TET 6 24 Short Range Long Range SR LR Radio components 2 2 23 Short Range Long Range SR LR Radio with dismount components 2 24 Short Range SR Radio components Short Range SR Radio with dismount components 2 2 22 Short Range SR Radio
10. Carrying Case 50 2 19 8 36 2 14 3 18 0 7 Manpack Radio with RT 1523A Manpack Radio with RT 1523B Manpack Radio with RT 1523C 12 4 26 9 Manpack Radio with RT 1523D 12 4 26 9 Length of long antenna when folded is 45 7 CM 18 IN When using BA 5590 as main power battery and short antenna AS 3683 A 11 5820 890 10 8 2 34 Radio Performance Data 2 16 Table 2 4 Radio Performance Data om om 1 LOW LO 200 M to 400 M pe pomme ome pe omm om DATA 1600 BPS HIGH 1 KM to 3 KM EDM DATA 1200N HIGH Hl 5 KM to 10 KM EDM DATA 4800N HIGH HI 3 KM to 5 KM EDM DATA 9600N HIGH HI 1 KM to 3 KM Above data apply equally to dismount radios and RCUs Ranges shown are for planning purposes only They are based upon line of sight are average for normal conditions Ranges depend upon location sighting weather surrounding noise level among other factors Use of the OE 254 antenna will increase ranges for both voice and data transmissions Enemy jamming and mutual interference conditions will degrade ranges In data transmissions use of lower baud rate increases the range EDM data rates are available on C D and E Model radios 2 4 2 4 2 4b TM 11 5820 890 10 8 BATTERY REQUIREMENTS DESCRIPTION Main Pow
11. Controls KEYPAD The PLGR keypad provides 12 buttons through which the operator exercises control This paragraph will discuss only those keys which the SINCGARS operator may use to check and load radio sync time and to toad PLGR keys from an ANCD For navigational functions see PLGR manuals aka 7 8 g WP POS NAV CLR 0 NUM OFF LOCK Figure 5 17 PLGR KEYPAD PLGR KEYPAD BUTTONS AND USES BUTTON PURPOSE ON BRT Pressing the ON BRT button once turns the PLGR on holding this key On Bright down with PLGR on enables the operator to adjust the display backlighting using up down arrows UP ARROW These keys are used to change display pages change number alpha DOWN ARROW field values activate functions and adjust brightness LEFT ARROW These keys are used to move the cursor from field to field in the display RIGHT ARROW Pressing the MENU key once displays first page of the system menu pressing it a second time displays the second page 5 21 11 5820 890 10 8 BUTTON PURPOSE WP Pressing the WP key causes the Waypoint menu to be displayed Waypoint POS Pressing the POS key allows the Position display to be viewed Position NAV When waypoints are loaded pressing the NAV key allows Navigation Navigation displays to be viewed without waypoints loaded NAV key does not work Pressing the OFF key once starts a 30 second shut down process pres
12. lt N Figure 2 19 SIP VAA Connectors 2 27 11 5820 890 10 8 J3 J4 J5 46 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J16 E1 2A B P1 2 28 RF PA Control FIT A provides control lines and power supply for the RF Power Amplifier PA RS 422 RS 423 19 pin connector for full duplex connections DATA B 6 pin connector used to couple VAA J4 to RT BAUD DATA port using a W 4 cable The W 4 cable is used only for Packet data mode operations DATA A 6 pin connector used to couple VAA J5 to RT A AUD DATA port using a W 4 cable The W 4 cable is used only for Packet data mode operations RS 232 RS 423 19 pin connector that couples data transfer equipment to the VAA used for FBCB2 connection RT B System Connector 27 pin system connector for RT B RT A System Connector 27 pin system connector for RT A Control Monitor 6 pin connector for use of a control monitor 11291 Frequency Information Connector 12 pin connector for frequency information interface from RT A and RT B Dual SNAP connection for FHMUX RF PA Control RT B 14 pin connector for control of external RT B power amplifier GPS In 6 pin and coax rectangular connector interface for GPS receivers GPS B interface between GPS buffer and RT B GPS A interface between GPS buffer and RT A GPS In interface for GPS antenna Two wire binding posts used for remote control of RT A RT B via C 11
13. 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Set RT D MODE to FH M RT D serves as NCS on F2 ensure RT B is in FH Set RT C and RT D See below for COMSEC COMSEC to CT PT switch requirements Request RT A NCS call RXMT mission is now being RT B using RXMT setup performed RXMT MODE When ASIP radios are used at the RXMT site and are temporarily taken out of the RXMT mode the RXMT cable must be disconnected until the radios are placed back info a RXMT mode RXMT may be performed as FH to FH SC to SC or mixed FH to SC FH to SC mode is particularly effective when communications between a SINCGARS net and a VRC Series 12 or similar SC net are required n The use of two OE 254 antennas separated as widely as feasible may be required in order to achieve line of sight communications KKK See Special Operator Task 7 for the procedure regarding sending an ERF RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio requires that COMSEC switches of RXMT radios be set to PT for SC SC and FH SC communications Only the SC RT must be in PT If the net is operating in CT the RXMT operators can monitor only the FH portion of the traffic In RXMT mode RT C and RT D provide half duplex communication A handset or speaker must be connected to both RXMT radios for both sides of a communication to be heard by RXMT operators pM E au i x SV T
14. 11 5820 890 10 8 TECHNICAL MANUAL OPERATOR S MANUAL 4 9 e m gt e 7 gt C WP SINCGARS SINCGARS GROUND COMBAT NET RADIO ICOM MANPACK RADIO AN PRC 119A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9482 EIC L2Q SHORT RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO AN VRC 87A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9480 EIC L22 SHORT RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO WITH SINGLE RADIO MOUNT AN V R C 87C NSN 5820 01 304 2045 EIC GDC SHORT RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO WITH DISMOUNT AN VRC 88A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9481 EIC L23 SHORT RANGE LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO AN VRC 89A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9479 EIC L24 LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO AN VRC 90A D F NSN 5820 01 268 5105 EIC L25 SHORT RANGE LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO WITH DISMOUNT AN VRC 91A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9478 EIC L26 SHORT RANGE LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO AN VRC 92A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9477 USED WITH AUTOMATED NET CONTROL DEVICE ANCD AN CYZ 10 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR AN PSN 11 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU FREQUENCY HOPPING MUTIPLEXER FHMUX 127 Approved for public release distribution is unlimited HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 1 DECEMBER 1998 Os TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SAFETY STEPS FOLLOW IF SOMEONE IS THE VICTIM OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT TRY TO PULL OR GRAB THE INDIVIDUAL IF POSSIBLE TURN OFF THE ELECTRICAL POWER IF YOU CANNOT TURN OFF THE ELECTRICAL POWER PULL PUSH OR LIFT THE PERSO
15. HH Enter MM the minute ahead of GPS time When RT and GPS minutes are the same zero seconds press STO on RT If time stored in RT is more than one second different from GPS time reload sync time Manual loading of GPS sync time is complete Figure 4 11 CHANGING RT SYNC TIME 4 6e CUE Method SO EASY SITUATION PROCEDURE TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The CUE and ERF method of late net entry does work but it requires much more of the operator than the other methods described It also requires action on the part of the NCS or alternate NCS and it involves the use of SC transmissions with probable displacements following each A situation in which an operator may find it necessary to use the CUE and ERF method is when no net traffic is heard data or sync time are believed to be at fault and neither an ANCD nor a PLGR is available for reloading For the procedure to perform CUE and ERF method of late net entry see Figures 4 12 and 4 13 below or Special Operator Task 5 Perform CUE and ERF Late Net Entry 1 Load CUE and MAN frequencies into RT 2 Set CHAN to CUE COMSEC to PT 3 Press PTT for 5 seconds no need to talk 4 Set COMSEC to CT immediately 5 Wait for NCS to respond repeat steps 2 4 every 15 seconds until a response is received Figure 4 12 OPERATOR S CUE amp ERF PROCEDURE To respond to the operator s and request the NCS or
16. 1 Connect ANCD to RT using Press LOAD on RT fill cable press 2 Press RT LOAD Transfer of COMSEC key is STO X completed Remember that CUE and MAN channels use the in channel 5 Do not change this key unless you are sure the new key is to be used for CUE and MAN channels also b Transfer key from ANCD to RT Connect ANCD to RT or to KYK 13 or KYX 15 The same procedure may be used for COMSEC devices 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3e Designate New Default Loadset NCS Option 1B DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART SUBTASKS Change default loadset This optional task allows an NCS to change the designation of the default loadset stored in the ANCD This function is useful during periodic updating for example when the current loadset is to be replace by one which was carried in reserve in the ANCD database By changing the default the NCS makes it easy for operators or communications specialists to transfer a new loadset to other ANCDs of the unit or to load the default loadset into radios DESIGNATE NEW DEFAULT LOADSET ACTIONS RESULTS 1 Turn ANCD ON select Soi Radio supervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter SETUP select iCom Nonicom 4 Enter ICOM select Loadset None 5 Enter LOADSET select Loadset name ENTR DI 6 Select loadset and press Select ENTR Nonicom 7 Press ABORT Send Receive
17. RADIO SET AN VRC 87F SHORT RANGE Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA 1 AM 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 AM 7239B VRC 80063 148136 1 AM 7239C VRC 80063 A3245066 1 or AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3267335 Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 80063 A3103735 7 or 1 80063 A3255571 RT to VAA 1 Receiver Transmitter Radio 1 RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 Denotes Dismount Components 11 5820 890 10 8 1 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF END ITEM Continued 2 National Stock Number 5820 01 267 9480 5820 01 351 5259 5820 01 351 5259 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5340 01 430 4723 5340 01 456 7985 5820 01 267 9481 5820 01 352 1694 5820 01 452 8735 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5995 01 310 0335 5995 01 426 6728 5985 01 235 9189 6160 01 284 4200 6160 01 304 2034 6160 01 424 8514 5965 00 043 3463 5895 01 432 8370 5820 01 322 3477 5895 01 461 4505 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5340 01 430 4723 5340 01 456 7985 3 5 Description Qty CAGEC and Part Number Reqd RADIO SET AN VRC 87A RADIO SET AN VRC 87D continued RADIO SET AN VRC 87F
18. RADIOS One Control Monitor C M can control up to three radios mounted in vehicular amplifier adapters VAA A three position switch controls radio selection FUNCTIONS The Control Monitor may be used to control radio RF Power RT Mode Channel COMSEC keys and active standby status of C M SELF TEST A built in self test enables the Control Monitor to check its control functions through proper manipulation of C M controls RADIO CAPABILITIES Capabilities of the radios controlled by a Control Monitor are the same as those for any SINCGARS radio 2 38 11 5820 890 10 8 2 9 LOUDSPEAKER 05 671 2 9 15 671 Components ON OFF SWITCH 1 INDICATOR LAMP DS1 HANDSET CONNECTOR 1 Loudspeaker LS 671 2 Cable 13292 connects loudspeaker to Figure 2 23 Components of Loudspeaker LS 671 2 9b LS 671 Physical Data NOTE Weights are in kilograms measurements are in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches All weights are approximate all measurements are maximums Table 2 14 LS 671 Physical Data ITEM LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT Loudspeaker 10 6 12 6 14 6 LS 671 4 2 4 9 5 8 E Cable n a n a n a n a CX 13292 Length of 3 to 100 feet Cable ends are marked RADIO and SPEAKER They can be reversed physically but the radio LS 671 will not operate Be sure LS 671 cable is properly installed 11 5820 890 10
19. 6 11 Change net ID task 5 60 Cipher Text CT MEC 4 3 Cold Start net opening procedure 0 4 17 Common Connections Si 2 1 3 Common ZULU time 4 11 4 2 Conduct Cold Start net opening task 6 15 Conduct Hot Start net opening task eee eee 6 14 Conduct retransmission RXMT operations task 5 56 Connectors ASIP 2 11 Connectors SIP 2 10 Index 1 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Consolidated index of Army publications and blank forms 1 3 Control Monitor qestdedsdeuadeseueueaedadededaquus auae dedo 2 37 Components uu lu rus raa n e 2 37 Operator Controls 5 22 Performance data 2 38 Physical datas se se se se bebe dried dri Control Receiver Transmitter 2 35 Operator CON rOIS es 5 18 2 38 Physical data ECCO EE ee ere re eer ere 2 36 Cross net communications 4 12 CUE and Electronic Remote Fill method of late net entry 4 21 Designate new default loadset task
20. 7 Press PgDN to Connect to RT and press desired then press ENTR SEND WAIT 6 26 SUBTASKS ACTIONS 1 Say Standby for AK OTAR acknowledge Send AK d Load TEK sent by AK OTAR in NCS radio 2 Press SEND on ANCD 1 Enter LD 2 Enter TEK 3 Press PgDN to display and ENTR to select 4 Enter QUIT Connect ANCD to RT AUD FILL press 1 Press LOAD STO and X TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RESULTS Target operators are alerted CT contact is confirmed Transfer in progress 1 Keys Transferred Vg Ld Rv Ak Mk vU select Tek Kek Select key quit name number Select key quit name number XMT Connect ANCD to RT Press LOAD RT 1 Keys Transferred Vg Ld Rv Ak Mk vU 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS e Update KEK used for AK 1 Set FCTN to LD and Select key qUit OTAR enter VU name number 2 Press PgDN to Connect to RT and press RCV desired then press ENTR 3 Press RCV on ANCD Transfer in Progress Enter Text ID gt 4 Enter TEXT ID and Key updated successfully press ENTR 5 Press down arrow Select key qUit name number 6 Press ABORT until screen Ld Rv shown appears A Mk vU 7 Enter LD select Tek Kek 8 Enter KEK Select key quit name number 9 Press PgDN to display and Select key quit ENTR to select KEK X XM
21. CUE message to appear in the RT display of the NCS and Alternate NCSs RESPOND TO CUE CALLS ACTIONS Switch from operational channel to CUE in CT Call CUE caller using CUE chan and CT mode RESULTS Keep SC messages as brief as possible b Assist CUE caller as 1 required 2 3 4 c Resume normal 1 communications 2 Upon contact direct caller to go to MAN and CT Determine CUE caller s requirement Provide CUE caller an ERF if required Admit caller to net if authorized Return to operational channel If enemy has DF capability move to new location N A See Primary NCS Task 4 or Special Operator Task 7 Do not leave your net if an Alt NCS is available Alt NCS should be prepared to displace frequently Either the NCS or Alt NCS may respond to CUE calls The preferred solution is for an Alt NCS to respond to CUE calls leaving the NCS free to control the net An Alt NCS may use the FH M position to send an on the MAN channel while the NCS continues to use FH M on the operational channel without interfering with net sync time 11 5820 890 10 8 6 4 SPECIAL NCS TASKS 6 4a Definition of Special NCS Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED There are five tasks categorized as special for SINCGARS NCS personnel These five tasks enable a SINCGARS NCS to electronically transfer FH data to include a TSK SOI info
22. Check for proper installation of cables Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cables Before Ensure VAA 1 is Ensure VIC AM 1780 circuit breaker is ON Turn Power Switch to NORM Power lamp should light COMM CHECK Intercomm Check ability to talk on Intercom does Radio A Intercom from all crew not function Radio control boxes at ALL INT ONLY and A CDR only at position C Check ability to talk and listen to Radio A from all crew control boxes at ALL and A Check ability to listen to Radio from all crew control boxes at ALL and Although the SINCGARS radios of a combat vehicle equipped with the VIC intercom system can operate without the VIC many combat vehicles require the operational use of the intercom for internal vehicle command and control Whether your VIC system being inoperative constitutes a Non Mission Ready status will vary with combat vehicle type 11 5820 890 10 8 8 24 Loudspeaker 15 671 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR LOUDSPEAKER 15 671 Item to Check Service CONTROLS POWER SWITCH VOLUME CONTROL CABLE LS 671 Cable CX 13292 Before POWER CB1 VAA LS 671 Power Switch LS 671 Power Indicator Lamp Before LS 671 CONTROL OF RT RT OFF ON Loudspeaker Volume Handset Volume Operator Not Fully Mission Procedure Capable If Check for cracked or brok
23. Vehicular radios Check for broken antenna parts Check for missing antenna parts Check for tie downs and antenna tips Not Fully Mission Capable IF Broken control does not function properly Loose control does not function properly Frozen control does not function properly Knob rnissing and control does not function properly Cable is missing Cable is damaged and cannot be used Antenna is not properly grounded Antenna part broken and cannot be used Antenna part is missing Item to Operator Check Service Procedure Before POWER Manpack Check for presence of main battery Vehicular i Check for availability of vehicle power Either radio Move COMSEC from Z to PT adjust DIM move FCTN from OFF to Z FH check that RT display lights 5 Before SELF TEST With FCTN in Z FH check that display shows GOOD i Move COMSEC to CT and check that alarm will clear Move to TST and check that RT display shows GOOD at end 6 Before KEYPAD With RT set to CT SC LD and channel shown a Press FREQ CLR and enter test frequency CUE 31000 MAN 32000 CHAN 1 43000 CHAN 2 54000 CHAN 3 65000 CHAN 4 76000 CHAN 5 87000 CHAN 6 87975 Press STO for each entry TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Not Fully Mission Capable IF Main battery is missing and cannot be replaced No vehicle power and cannot be corrected RT display does not light
24. fire support vehicle Abbreviation FM FOM FQMER FR FREQ GD GOTST GPS GRP HH HI HR HRCRD HS HUB HZ INC INIT INT JD KEK KG KHZ Description frequency modulation figure of merit frequency management error response failure frequency good go to test global positioning system group hours high hand receipt handheld remote control radio device handset hold up battery hertz intercomm integrated COMSEC identification intermediate frequency internet controller initiate intercomm internet protocol Julian Date key encryption key kilogram kilohertz Abbreviation LB LCD LD LDE LNE LO LOS LOUT LR LR LR LTR MAN MB MHZ MK MM MP MSE MSRT MT MX NAV NCS NOGPS NOKEY NRI NUM TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Description pound liquid crystal display load local control data late net entry low line of sight lockout long range long range long range letter medium manual mounting base megahertz manual keying minutes manpack mobile subscriber equipment mobile subscriber radio telephone mount fill device new or enhanced data mode navigation net control station GPS device not attached required key missing net radio interface number 11 5820 890 10 8 Abbreviation OFST OPR OTAR PA PAM PC PCKT PLGR PM PMCS POS PSA PT PTRX PTT PWR PYRO QREF RCU RCV REM RF ROD RT RCU RT RV De
25. 7 4412 STEM D Zu d utn RETRANSMIT CABLE RADIO C RADIO D RETRANSMIT STATION RADIOA 7 o WES MR eg L MADIOR XE QUEE INE KI CRX OUTSTATION STATION for UON X C 2 HILL OMe 222 OR HIGHEST POINT E Figure 5 21 RXMT Operation 5 57 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5 Send as Part of RXMT Operation Special Operator Task 7 DESCRIPTION This is not a normal operator task It is performed only as part of an RXMT operation When operators are required to perform RXMT operations it may be necessary for them to send an ERF to the distant station in order to establish FH communications Sending an ERF requires the sending operator to change from FH to FH M with associated risk to net sync time if the operator fails to return to FH immediately after sending the ERF The ERF procedure is known by all NCS personnel thus the RXMT operator should be able to obtain verbal help if needed DETAILED FLOWCHART SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Obtain data to be sent If not already loaded load If net ID only see Special Operator by ERF ERF data in RT D ae 8 for details b Contact distant station Alert RT B RXMT data is ERF is sent on operational channel being sent by ERF ee for the alert c Prepare RT to send ERF 1 Set FCTN to LD 2 Set MODE to FH M d Send ERF 1 Press LOAD on RT Display shows HLD _ keypad 2 Enter channel where data Display shows HF XXX
26. Conduct Cold Start Net Opening This is an alternate method for opening the net It requires operators to load COMSEC and FH data standby to receive an ERF containing sync time and properly storing the ERF It requires close coordination and correct operator actions It may be used in situations where the NCS wants all operators to enter the net at the exact same time Respond to CUE Calls This task is performed whenever the CUE message appears in the NCS s RT display In that response to a CUE message requires leaving the operational net transmitting in SC mode possibly sending an ERF and probably displacing physically to avoid enemy direction finding the NCS designates an Alternate NCS to respond to the CUE call 6 3c SUBTASKS a DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Transfer Partial COMSEC FH Data ANCD to ANCD Primary NCS Task 1 In addition to transferring complete SOI files quick reference or full SOls an NCS is expected to be able to transfer partial data loads For example performance of this task enables the NCS to transfer specific loadsets Esets COMSEC keys TSKs or sync time from one ANCD to another This capability facilitates dissemination within the unit when less than total data is required There are three options associated with this task allowing the NCS to perform selected special functions NCS personnel perform the actions required in each subtask in the order shown R
27. Control knobs are affixed with top positioned Phillips screws RT cover is affixed with Phillips screws All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator RT Mode switch may remain in FH position to change net ID Sync time may be loaded electronically from an Automated Net Control Device ANCD a Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR manually via the keypad or by ERF Running self test with COMSEC in PT results in display message of GO CT Changing to CT clears message RT will accept ERF if sync time is less than 100 days different from net sync time Figure 2 3 RT 1523A Features RT 15238 Control knobs are affixed with side positioned Allen screws RT cover is affixed with slot headed screws All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator RT Mode switch may remain in FH position to change net ID Sync time may be loaded electronically from an Automated Net Control Device ANCD a Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR manually via the keypad or by ERF Running self test with COMSEC in PT results in display message of GO CT Changing to CT clears message RT will accept ERF if sync time is less than 100 days different from net sync time Figure 2 4 RT 1523B Features 11 5820 890 10 8 RT 1523C Control knobs are affixed with side positioned Allen screws RT cover is affixed with Phillips headed screws All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator RT Mode
28. Figure 4 14 SENDING MK OTAR 11 5820 890 10 8 RECEIVING Target NCSs perform the steps shown in Figure 4 15 below also see Special NCS Task 5 Receive and Store TEK Sent by MK Method of for detailed procedures Prepare radio to receive MK OTAR FCTN to SQ ON COMSEC to CT and DATA to OFF Prepare ANCD to receive MK OTAR Turn ANCD ON enter Radio COMSEC RV Connect ANCD to RT ACK to NCS when ready for MK When directed set RT to Chan 6 press RCV on ANCD Return to operational channel Enter Text ID skip tag sequence New TEK is now stored in target NCS ANCD ready for distribution when required Figure 4 15 RECEIVING MK OTAR SENDING AK OTAR To send a new TEK to net members by AK OTAR the NCS will follow the steps shown below in Figure 4 16 also see Special NCS Task 4 Send to Net Operators Using AK Method of Prepare NCS radio for AK OTAR FCTN to LD MODE to FH M COMSEC to CT and DATA to OFF Prepare NCS ANCD to send AK OTAR turn ON enter Radio COMSEC and AK select key Alert operators to standby press SEND Load AK OTAR TEK into NCS radio select key and press LOAD STO CHAN RT Update KEK used for AK OTAR enter VU select KEK and press RCV on ANCD Load updated KEK into NCS radio enter text ID Ld and KEK press LOAD STO and 6 Figure 4 16 SENDING AK OTAR FOLLOW UP ACTIONS The NCS sending an AK O
29. Performance of this task involves turning on the ANCD selecting the SOI program entering QREF and scrolling to the element of SOI information desired DETAILED FLOWCHARTS 1 Rules to remember in obtaining SOI information from the ANCD are ACTION RESULT ABORT Causes ANCD to return to SOI menu Arrow down 4 You must press arrow down to go to the next screen Arrow right arrow left Allows viewing of additional information and return Arrow up arrow down Allows viewing of each item DELETE To delete SOI set enter SOI then Set and press DELE key ENTER shown as ENTR Causes activation of the entry you have selected Hot keys Capital letter of item selected eg sufX allows direct shift QREF to full SOI file J key for JUMP In Find causes ANCD to continue search for next item key for KEEP Causes item being viewed to be stored in QREF file MAIN MENU Returns you to SOI RADIO SUPERVISOR menu 5 37 11 5820 890 10 8 ACTION RESULT PgUP PgDN Moves you to top or bottom of the list ZERO red button Used in combat emergency only DO NOT use for deletions 2 look up any of the up to 40 QREF items of SOI information contained in the QREF file perform the following steps ACTION RESULT Turn ANCD ON select Soi Radio supervisor Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Enter QREF Last QREF item viewed appears in ANCD display Entering
30. RT 1523 A B C D Seal or 1 8 for RT 1523E you may wait until your battery is exhausted before changing it One indicator of a weak manpack radio battery is a signal strength display reading of 3 or less when you PTT with RF PWR set to HI For training continue to use your main power battery until it is exhausted This is to save batteries and money Upon completing a mission when the main battery is to be removed note and record battery life on the side of the battery The Battery Life Indicator must be read before FCTN is set to OFF or battery life data will be lost HUB ROLE HUB AA CELL TM 11 5820 890 10 8 In combat or training remember that with a good HUB battery installed your RT will retain all stored data while you replace the main battery The ASIP RT does not have a HUB battery it contains circuitry that retains fill for 15 minutes after main power is lost either turning off vehicular power or changing battery A HUB inser has been designed for vehicular applications that will accommodate a BA 5372 or AA batteries The insert will insure that fill will be retained during periods that vehicular power is turned off listening silence or other mission requirements 5372 0 Figure 5 22 HUB Insert 5 65 11 5820 890 10 8 WORST CASE Remember also that in the absolute worst case where you lose main power and your HUB is dead all you have to do is per
31. RT display does not show GOOD COMSEC alarm will not clear Self test ends with other than GOOD Any test frequency 0 9 cannot be entered in RT Any test frequency 0 9 cannot be stored in RT 11 5820 890 10 8 Check Service DATA LOADING SC Freq COMSEC key FH data Sync time COMM Voice data SC mode FH mode Plain text Cipher text RXMT mode Operator Procedure Load SC freq Load COMSEC key Load FH data Load sync time electronic or manual Check for sidetone Check voice comm in SC PT and FH CT check SQ OFF while in SC mode If data comm is mission required check data comm in Not Fully Mission Capable IF SC freq will not load COMSEC key will not load FH data will not load Sync time will not load Sidetone is not heard Cannot communicate in SC PT or FH CT voice mode Cannot communicate in mission required data mode using mission related data device FH CT using mission related data device If RXMT is mission required check RXMT in all mission related modes Cannot retransmit in mission related modes Does not function properly means that a control will not do what it is intended to do for example turning the FCTN knob does not change the radio s function it may be necessary to wait until item 8 Communications Check to determine for sure that some controls do or do not function pr
32. on Source Transfer in progress Data Sync Time ANCD Transfer successful Within 20 seconds press Transfer in progress RCV on Target ANCD Transfer successful You must enter DATABASE in order to proceed kk MWOD Multiple Word Of Day is a term used in the loading procedure for the Have Quick radio found in selected aircraft kkk Do not press SEND on Source ANCD until you are ready to press RCV on Target ANCD then press RCV within about 20 seconds of pressing SEND You must enter YES in order to proceed NOTE You can c ear your ANCD of COMSEC FH data sync lime by performing steps b l through b 5 above 5 46 11 5820 890 10 8 5 54 Transfer QREF SOI Information ANCD to ANCD Special Operator Task 2 DESCRIPTION This task is required in preparation for unit operations SOI information is passed from the brigade or higher LCU operator down to unit Signal Officers and NCSs who develop unit specific Quick Reference QREF files for operator use Dissemination within units is accomplished by transferring SOI information from one ANCD to another When this special task in not performed by communications specialists or designated NCOs operators must be trained to perform the data transfer Operators who are expected to perform Special Operator Task 1 should also be trained in this task DETAILED FLOWCHART SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare Source ANCD 1
33. with minimum effort or movement Only occasionally is it necessary for a crewmember to move to the radio front panel to make control setting changes 4 41 11 5820 890 10 8 4 114 Use of Control Monitor SOURCE PURPOSE FUNCTIONS CONTROLS FRONT PANEL The Control Monitor C M C 11291 is a part of selected installation kits DA Pam 25 30 for listings of individual kits The purpose of the control monitor is to enable vehicle crews to operate their radios from positions other than directly at the radios One control monitor can provide for control of up to three radios one at a time Most functions of the radio are included Filling the radio with COMSEC FH data and sync time are exceptions 5 Figure 4 29 below for a view of C M controls The function each major control performs is described below C 11291A VRC Figure 4 29 CONTROL MONITOR 4 42 11 5820 890 10 8 Switch Run self test TEST Switch Used with the INIT switch to ee Set RF Power Set AT MODE RT MODE to include turning power off oe Change channels CHAN Select COMSEC key VAR ee Select CT or PT se Control status Should read e Switch Used in conjunction with the switch to make the changes cited above Moving the INIT UP causes FCTN markers to move to the right moving it DOWN moves markers to the left e RADIO Switch Sel
34. 4 129 Role of Signal Officers NCOs IMPORTANCE FUNCTIONS The important role of unit Signal Officers and Non Commissioned Officers has been significantly increased with the fielding of the SINCGARS system Some of the SINCGARS related specific functions performed by Signal Officers and NCOs are Development and distribution of loadsets including those required to support task organization changes Distribution of new data in timely manner and maintenance of data reserves Advising and assisting NCS personnel and unit operators as required Ensuring operator and NCS job proficiency to include conducting training if required Developing and implementing unit sustainment training programs including periodic COMM EXs Advising commander on COMSEC requirements including compromise recovery procedures Advising and assisting commanders and SINCGARS users in equipment and system interfaces to include AFATDS ASAS CSSCS FAADC2 IFSAS IVIS MCS MSE and TACFIRE LIGHT TACFIRE as required See appropriate technical bulletin TB 11 5820 890 10 series 4 49 11 5820 890 10 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 4 50 11 5820 890 10 8 5 OPERATOR TASKS IN THIS CHAPTER 5 1 GENERAL 5 2 START UP PROCEDURE 5 3 OPERATOR CONTROLS a SINCGARS Rece
35. 4 3 Transfer COMSEC FH data from ANCD to ANCD task ees 5 45 Transfer COMSEC key from ANCD to RT task e Transfer full SOI information from ANCD to ANCD task eee 5 49 Transfer partial COMSEC FH data from ANCD to ANCD task 6 7 Transfer Quick Reference QREF SOI information from ANCD to ANCD task 5 47 Transfer selected SOI information from ANCD to ANCD task Transmit SOI information using Broadcast mode task 6 21 Transmit updated FH data via net update ERF Electronic Remote Fill task 6 19 Transmitter characteristics umma qi gea doi dieto ddnde ae aj RR je ca 2 3 Two digit J lan data 4 10 Use SIP ASIP RT as an RCU SERA a a Oe Re eK VAA Connectors A B models 2 25 VAA Connectors C D models 2 27 Vehicular Intercom set VIC IE DAN pace ene ve neta cone 3 10 Capabilities UELUT 3 10 Characteristics ite Se tat 3 10 Operator eit i 5 25 Operator maintenance Mee ee ee eee ee eee ee re MOS errr eee UR a 8 18 Physical ANNE ee eee ee ee ee eee er eee ee ror 3 11 Vehicular Veh radios n Hn nn nnn 2 19 Performance data dr E rd dr nnda 2 31 Physical dais da 2 30 AO wcrsrsrsrererrrevzzrzace 4 10 Index 8
36. 6160 01 424 8514 5965 00 043 3463 5895 01 432 8370 5820 01 322 3477 5895 01 461 4505 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5820 01 267 9480 5820 01 351 5259 5820 01 451 8248 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5995 01 310 0335 5995 01 426 6728 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 3 4 5 Description U M Qty CAGEC and Part Number Reqd RADIO SET 119 MANPACK RADIO SET AN PRC 119D MANPACK RADIO SET AN PRC 119F MANPACK Denotes SIP I Denotes ASIP Antenna Manpack AS 3683 PRC 80063 A3132025 1 1 Battery Box 1 CY 8523A PRC 80063 A3018381 1 CY 8523B PRC 80063 A3132600 1 Required for MP SIP RT as an CY 8523C PRC 80063 A3249648 1 1 Required for MP radio using HRCRD Handset HRCRD H 250 U 80058 or 1 Handheld Remote Control Radio Device C 12493 U 80063 A3249865 1 1 Requires use of Battery Box CY 8523C PRC KKK Carrying Case Radio 1 80063 A3142076 1 80063 A3142076 2 Receiver Transmitter Radio 1 RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 5 RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 or RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 RT 1523E C U 80063 A3267334 RADIO SET AN VRC 87A SHORT RANGE RADIO SET AN VRC 87D SHORT RANGE
37. 7 d Advantages 4 9 USE OF JULIAN DATE AND GPS ZULU TIME a Two Digit Julian Date b Precise GPS Time _ c Common Zulu Time n Rx RR d Cross Net Communications NETOPENING GNE NUR T TETTE b LoadSetsS uses eie vade po Hot Start Procedure e Cold Start Procedure LATE ENTRY E dade ERAS a ie sacar catenin en one a Passive Method _ Hot Start Option 4 Reloading Sync Time CUE and ERF Method PERIODIC UPDATING COMSEG KEYS oes pee PO ade 4 22 oM FH Data rm 4 22 SOI Information __ 4 22 d SyncTime xot eq eR ied 4 22 e ANCD Loads and Updating 4 23 11 5820 890 10 8 ELECTRONIC UPDAT
38. 8 2 9 15 671 Performance Data PURPOSE POWER SWITCH POWER INDICATOR HANDSET CONNECTOR VOLUME CONTROL J1 CONNECTOR 2 40 Used to transmit and receive voice communications in vehicular radio configurations Used to turn the loudspeaker on and off May also be used to turn radio power on and off when VAA 1 is set to ON Lamp lights when power switch is set to ON Provides for connection of handset Adjusts volume level of loudspeaker or handset To adjust loudspeaker volume pull control out and turn To adjust handset volume push control in and turn Enables loudspeaker to be connected to mounting base or single radio mount using loudspeaker cable CX 13292 11 5820 890 10 8 3 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT IN THIS CHAPTER AUTOMATED NET CONTROL DEVICE ANCD AN CYZ 10 3 2 ANCDCapabilties 222222222222 3 2 b ANCD Characteristics 22222 3 3 ANCD Physical Data uisus usus 3 3 See TM 11 5810 394 148 for detailed operating instructions 3 2 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR 11 3 4 a PLGR Capabilities 000022 3 4 b Characteristics e Physical Data See TM 11 5825 291 13 for detailed operating instructions 3 3 FREQUENCY HOPPING MULTIPLEXER FHMUX TD 1456 VRC a FHMUX Components b Physical Data 3 5 ES 3 5 3 5 FHM
39. 99 30 60 27 27 58 86 17 47 78 08 39 70 00 31 61 28 28 59 87 18 48 79 09 40 71 01 32 62 29 29 88 19 49 80 10 41 72 02 33 63 30 30 89 20 50 81 11 42 73 03 34 64 31 31 90 51 12 43 04 65 JULIAN DATE CALENDAR LEAP YEAR 01 32 61 92 22 53 83 14 45 75 06 36 2 02 33 62 93 23 54 84 15 46 76 07 37 03 34 63 94 24 55 85 16 47 77 08 38 4 04 35 64 95 25 56 86 17 48 78 09 39 5 05 36 65 96 26 57 87 18 49 79 10 40 6 06 37 66 97 27 58 88 19 50 80 11 41 7 07 38 67 98 28 59 89 20 51 81 12 42 8 08 39 68 99 29 60 90 21 52 82 13 43 9 09 40 69 00 30 61 91 22 53 83 14 44 10 10 41 70 01 31 62 92 23 54 84 15 45 11 11 42 71 02 32 63 93 24 55 85 16 46 12 12 43 72 03 33 64 94 25 56 86 17 47 13 13 44 73 04 34 65 95 26 57 87 18 48 14 14 45 74 05 35 66 96 27 58 88 19 49 15 15 46 75 06 36 67 97 28 59 89 20 50 16 16 47 76 07 37 68 98 29 60 90 21 51 17 17 48 77 08 38 69 99 30 61 91 22 52 18 18 49 78 09 39 70 00 31 62 92 23 53 19 19 50 79 10 40 71 01 32 63 93 24 54 20 20 51 80 11 41 72 02 33 64 94 25 55 21 21 52 81 12 42 73 03 34 65 95 26 56 22 22 53 82 13 43 74 04 35 66 96 27 57 23 23 54 83 14 44 75 05 36 67 97 28 58 24 24 55 84 15 45 76 06 37 68 98 29 59 25 25 56 85 16 46 77 07 38 69 99 30 60 26 26 57 86 17 47 78 08 39 70 00 31 61 27 27 58 87 18 48 79 09 40 71 01 32 62 28 28 59 88 19 49 80 10 41 72 02 33 63 29 29 60 89 20 50 81 11 42 73 03 34 64 30 30 90 21 51 82 12 43 74 04 35 65 31 31 91 52 13 44 05 66 11 5820 890 10 8 TIME ZONE MAP
40. A N A Net update ERF is completed Store data to be sent by ERF in a channel other than your operational channel Net update 11 5820 890 10 8 6 44 Transfer SOI Information Using Broadcast Mode Special NCS Task 2 DESCRIPTION This procedure enables an NCS to send SOI Information electronically to net members wherever updating by physical connection of ANCD to ANCD proves to be impossible or impractical The Broadcast Mode requires approximately two minutes to transmit one time period of a battalion SOI extract The procedure includes a polling feature which allows the NCS to determine by automatic query if up to 16 net operators designated by special ID numbers did or did not receive the SOI information sent by Broadcast DETAILED FLOWCHART TRANSFER SOI INFORMATION USING BROADCAST MODE SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare NCS radio to Ensure RT is set to SQ ON N A Normal NCS RT settings send SOI by broadcast CT and FH M Change DATA from OFF to Broadcast uses data mode set 1200 to 1200 bps b Prepare ANCD for SOI 1 Turn ANCD ON select data broadcast Soi Radio sUpervlsor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter SEND Scroll amp press ENTR to select SOI set EH b Press down arrow SOI Set name Edn name This screen will appear only 6 Press to display and Do you want to transfer if QREF file is st
41. A3013365 1 AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 AM 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 AM 7239C VRC 80063 A3245066 1 or AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3267335 Amplifier Radio Frequency PA AM 7238 VRC 80063 A3013357 1 AM 7238A VRC 80063 A3132135 1 AM 7238B VRC 80063 A3210919 1 Mounting Base Electrical Equipment MT 6353 VRC 80063 A3014053 1 Cable Assembly Special Purpose CX 13291 VRC 80063 A3104037 Cable Assembly Radio CG 3856 VRC 80063 A3014032 3 Cable Assembly Radio Frequency W2 80063 A3013824 21 3 RT to PA Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 80063 A3103735 7 or 80063 A3255571 Denotes Dismount Components 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS END ITEM Continued 2 National Stock Number 5820 01 267 9477 5820 01 421 2605 5820 01 451 8249 5995 01 300 9324 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5340 01 392 0048 5340 01 456 7985 5820 01 304 2045 6130 01 284 4195 5995 01 323 2729 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 9 Description CAGEC and Part Number RADIO SET AN VRC 92A LONG RANGE LONG RANGE RADIO SET AN VRC 92D RADIO SET AN VRC 92F continued Cable Assembly Power CX 13303 VRC 80063 A3014040 9 VAA to PA Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 RT 1523B C U 8006
42. ANCD ON select 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter SEND Scroll 4 1 and press ENTR to select SOI Set 5 Press down arrow and Set name nr scroll to set desired Edn name tp ENTR 6 Press ENTR to select Do you want to transfer QREF Y N 7 Respond YES send to Pc Broadcast Stu 8 Enter ANCD Connect ANCD to ANCD M 9 Connect ANCDs and Press SEND to send press down arrow WAIT 5 47 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS b Prepare Target ANCD 1 Turn ANCD ON select for QREF SOI transfer Soi Radio supervisor 2 Enter 01 qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter RECEIVE receive from Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 5 Enter ANCD Connect ANCD to ANCD 6 Press down arrow Press RCV to receive WAIT Transfer QREF 501 1 Press SEND on Source Processing Please wait from ANCD to ANCD ANCD shows 96 of bytes sent Sending of SOI data is completed 2 Within 20 seconds press Processing Please wait RCV on Target ANCD shows number of bytes sent Receive operation was successful To develop QREF file merely scroll to the SO items desired and press KEEP to place each item in the QREF file i You must respond YES to proceed This screen appears only if a QREF f
43. Adpater Set Up 4 44 11 5820 890 10 8 4 111 Use of Remote Control Device C 2329 GRA 39 COMSEC The Remote Control Device C 2329 GRA 39 also provides for remote operation of SINCGARS radios but the wire line connection is not secure SET UP Figure 4 32 below shows a typical set up using local and remote control units terminating as illustrated in a TACFIRE device Various devices can be used including a handset CABLE PART OF C 2329 TACFIRE LOCAL REMOTE DEVICE CONTROL CONTROL 7 Hl AN GSC 21 C 2329 C 2328 AN GSQ 122 GRA 39 GRA 39 AN GYK 29 OR TO AUD DATA A J3 C 9901 RADIO CONNECTOR USE J2 FOR RADIO B OPERATION J3 FOR RADIO A OPERATION Figure 4 32 GRA 39 SET UP 4 45 11 5820 890 10 8 4 12 4 12 Net Discipline IMPORTANCE UPDATES SYNC TIME LOADING CUE FREQ 4 46 Net discipline is important for all combat net radios but it is especially so for SINCGARS For the members of the net to communicate each radio must have the same COMSEC key FH data and sync time While the NCS radio set to the FH M position automatically maintains sync time in all net radios within the required 4 second window use of the FH M position by other than the NCS can cause the net to lose common sync time and divide into two or more nets unable to communicate among them COMSEC keys TSKs and SOI information must be replaced at prescribed intervals Cha
44. COMSEC For control of these functions access to the manpack RT is not required The operator can control the volume level of audio at the HRCRD by use of the thumb wheel located on the side of the device Also the operator can turn the NRCRD back light on and off by pressing the round light button Operation of the HRCRD requires use of Battery Box CY 8523C for RT 1523C D which provides power from the main manpack battery to the remote control handset The cable attached to the HRCRD forms a Y with one end connected to the RT AUD DATA or AUD FILL port and the other end to the 6 pin connector of Battery Box CY 8523C or AUX connector of the RT 1523E Although the HRCRD is intended primarily for use with manpack radios it can be used with vehicular configurations by connecting one end of the Y cable to the J9 port of the VAA This will control the radio only Figure 3 7 Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD 3 6 HRCRD Cabling Controls Light Volume Radio Controls Transmit Receive TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Connect the Y cable ends to the RT AUD FILL or AUD DATA port and to the 6 pin connector on Battery Box CY 8523C or AUX connector of the RT 1523E Only Battery Box CY 8523C may be used with the HRCRD To control radio functions press SEL until the required function is highlighted CHAN COMSEC RF PWR MODE Then press the DOWN ARROW until the specific item you need
45. CX 13298 for operations Any configuration of the ground ICOM radio can be used for retransmission The two radios may be installed on the same vehicle on two separate vehicles or two manpack versions may be used RXMT cables come in two lengths 5 inches and 15 feet to accommodate various radio configurations There are three modes of retransmission when using SINCGARS radios Each is described below 1 Frequency hopping net to frequency hopping net 2 Frequency hopping net to single channel net 3 Single channel net to single channel net A typical situation requiring retransmission communications is used to illustrate the various modes and procedures An NCS has lost or is about to lose contact with one of the net stations This could be caused by distance or line of sight obstacles such as mountains between the two stations Whatever the cause the answer is to establish an RXMT station at a site that will enable the NCS requesting station and outstation to continue or resume communications In below note that the requesting NCS uses RADIO A the outstation uses RADIO B and the RXMT team uses RADIO C and RADIO D In RXMT configuration RADIO A communicates with RADIO B by passing traffic through RADIO C the RXMT cable and RXMT RADIO A REQUESTING STATION 4 28 RETRANSMIT CABLE RXMT RADIO C RADIO D RETRANSMIT STATION m F F Paes 2 Capi
46. Data 1 Is there FH data loaded in YES Continue the operational channel NO Reload RT cont 2 Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Continue 3 15 correct Net ID loaded YES Go to Step 6 operational channel NO Change net ID cont Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 6 Manpack Only Check Does main battery need to YES Replace battery cont Main Battery bechanged NO Go to Step 7 2 Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 7 11 5820 890 10 8 STEPS CHECKS ACTIONS Perform Hot Start Net 1 Do COMSEC FH data load YES Continue Entry in RT NO Go to TS Guide 1 2 Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Continue 3 NCS be contacted YES Problem is solved NO See Unit Maintenance ANCD time may not be valid if it has been more than 24 hours since ICOM fill of radio g For vehicular radios skip this step and continue with Step 7 Battery power can be checked by placing RF PWR in HI and pressing PTT Signal display of 2 of less indicates your battery is weak kkk Operator has option of using CUE and ERF method of late net entry in lieu of the Hot Start procedure if desired The possibility that there is no traffic on the net must be considered so try to contact your NCS to check serviceability of your radio 8 11 11 5820 890 10 8 OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 4 Radio Presents Strange Messag
47. Database sEtup Comsec Time Also use ICOM designation when preparing to fill an RCU Loadsets are identified with a indicating defaultoadset followed by an I for or an for Non ICOM ICOM fill will now load new y designated loadset 6 10 11 5820 890 10 8 6 31 Change Eset One Channel of RT NCS Option 1C DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART This optional task enables the NCS to change or replace the Eset FH data in one channel of the radio The preferred solution to this change requirement is to load a new loadset When loading a new loadset is infeasible this procedure allows the FH data in one channel of the radio to be changed without interfering with other channel loadings CHANGE ESET IN ONE CHANNEL OF RT SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Change Eset in one 1 Turn ANCD ON select channel of loadset Soi Radio supervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter DATABASE select Display Modify Remove build 4 Enter MODIFY select Loadset name ENTR DI 5 Select loadset and Replace Delete press ENTR ESET name ENTR 6 Enter REPLACE select select Eset quit ESET and press ENTR 7 Enter ESET select Eset name ENTR 8 Select new Eset and Modify another loadset press ENTR element Y N 9 Respond NO select Replace iNsert name The bUild feature should not be used unless
48. If not using Packet PCKT data mode or the internet controller INC feature of the SIP radio all data devices must be connected to the AUD DATA port not to the SIP VAA J3 AUD FILL Handsets used with the SIP RT may be connected to the AUD DATA or AUD FILL connector NOTE Handsets will not function if connected to the front of the SIP VAA 5 15 11 5820 890 10 8 Connectors ASIP RT P1 System This connector provides RT power and signaling interfaces GPS CONNECTOR SYSTEMS 6 55 Sa 1 d P1 AUXILIARY CONNECTOR AUD FILL CONNECTOR AUD DATA 12 43 RXMT Figure 5 1 3 ASIP RT Connectors J6 Auxiliary Used to connect HRCRD handset and two wire adapter J5 GPS Enables a PLGR to be connected to a manpack radio J3 AUD DATA The J4 AUD DATA connector supports general data communications at SINCGARS Data Rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 and 16 000 BPS and Enhanced Data Rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS The RS 232 interface allows transmission of data via SINCGARS ASIP radios using computers and commercial Xmodem software If not using Packet PCKT data mode or the internet controller INC feature of the ASIP radio all data devices must be connected to the AUD DATA port not to the ASIP VAA J2 AUD FILL Handsets used with the ASIP RT may be connected to the AUD DATA or AUD FILL connector NOTE Handsets will not function if connected t
49. If you are not sure that an antenna on your vehicle will clear a power line stop before you get close to the power fine and either carefully tie down the antenna or if necessary remove the antenna to make sure that you can safely drive under the power line During cross country operations do not allow anyone to stick an arm leg or weapon over the sides of the vehicle If your antenna accident y touches a power fine individuals who are in contact with vegetation or the ground could suffer death or sever injury for additional safety information refer to TB 43 0129 Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment Figure 4 22 VEHICULAR ANTENNA SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 4 33 11 5820 890 10 8 4 10 254 SOURCE EMPLOYMENT DUAL USE The OE 254 antenna is not a part of the SINCGARS radio system and must be requisitioned separately Refer to your MTO amp E or TDA for the number authorized This extended range antenna may be used with any configuration of ground SINCGARS radios including the manpack version By both its height and design the OE 254 helps to increase the operating range of any SINCGARS radio When two or more OE 254 antennas are employed in the same location a command post for example they should be separated by the maximum distance permitted by cabling When two OE 254 antennas are used with the same vehicle as during RXMT operations for example it is essential that they be sepa
50. Net identification ID Net members Offset Over the air rekey OTAR Packet Permanent memory Precision lightweight GPS receiver PLGR Primary tasks Retransmission RXMT Scanning Scrolling Single channel SC DEFINITION Feature of hopset that precludes use of selected frequencies also used to expand the number of frequencies contained in a hopset SC frequency and designated channel used for transmission and receipt of ERFs during cold start net openings may also be used for normal SC channel Configuration consisting of RT battery battery box antenna handset and carrying case carried on the back of the operator for dismounted operations Single designated station per net requiring use of the FH M mode position and performance of net control tasks assisted and supported by designated alternate NCS stations as warranted by operational requirements Three digit number from 000 to 999 designating specific nets within a given TSK All net stations other than the NCS and designated alternate NCSs Feature allowing SC frequencies to be changed by plus of minus 5 or 10 KHz to reduce the effect of enemy jamming or other interference Procedure by which TEK may be electronically transmitted from NCS to NCS or from NCS to net members New data mode in which data messages are divided into frames smaller than 1800 bytes each for processing over SINCGARS voice data nets The packet data mode PC
51. Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR AN PSN 11 8 4 Frequency Hopping Multiplexer FHMUX TD 1456 VRC 3 5 Secure Telephone Unit STU 3 8 Vehicular Intercommunications Set VIC AN VIC 1 3 10 Handheld Remote Control Radio Device 3 12 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Secure Cipher Text CT Communications 4 2 Single Channel SC Communications 4 4 Frequency Hopping FH Communications 4 6 Use of Julian Date and GPS Zulu Time 4 10 Net Opening 4 13 Late Net Entry 4 18 Periodic Updating sh ih yh aah at 4 22 Electronic Updating i Rah a ae Se 4 24 Retransmission RXMT Operations 4 28 Antennas 2 4 32 Remoting Capabilities A RA al aah at A teas a a as AOR OR 4 34 Net Management mv TIT 4 46 11 5820 890 10 8 PARA SUBJECT PAGE 5 OPERATOR 5 1 General ee cy nae a a d ue 5 2 Start Up
52. RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 5 RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 or RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 RT 1523E C U 80063 A3267334 Lever Locking 80063 Lever Locking ASIP 80063 A3256669 1 RADIO SET AN VRC 90A LONG RANGE RADIO SET AN VRC 90D LONG RANGE RADIO SET AN VRC 90F LONG RANGE Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA AM 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 7239C VRC 80063 A3245066 1 or AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3267335 Amplifier Radio Frequency PA AM 7238 VRC 80063 A3013357 1 7238A VRC 80063 A3132135 1 AM 7238B VRC 80063 A3210919 1 Denotes Dismount Components 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF END ITEM Continued 2 National Stock Number 5820 01 267 9481 5820 01 420 6618 5820 01 451 8246 5995 01 304 2026 5995 01 310 0355 5995 01 426 6728 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5820 01 267 9478 5820 01 420 6621 5820 01 451 8249 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5895 01 195 4844 5895 01 306 8093 5895 01 407 2627 5995 01 304 2026 5995 01 310 0355 5995 01 426 6728 5985 01 235 9189 6160 01 284 4200 6160 01 304 2034 6160 01 424 8514 9 Description CAGEC
53. RT can be used as a remote control unit by merely selecting the option under the key of the SIP ASIP RT keypad The C 11561 can still be used to remotely control a SIP ASIP radio for voice and SINCGARS data modes but it cannot be used for enhanced data modes A feature of the SIP ASIP RT is the ability to load GPS time from an attached PLGR using the very simple procedure The SIP ASIP RT contains an internal FSK detector circuit for use with the AD1 and TF data rates Use of a special CX 13808 U DMD interface cable is no longer necessary In addition TACFIRE devices must be cabled directly to the SIP ASIP RT AUD DATA connector The keypad of the SIP ASIP radio is similar to that of earlier versions except four of the keys have been given new designations RCU GPS SA and CID The ASIP keypad adds a MENU and Backlight function Each is explained below The RCU key is used to select operating mode options of RT RCU EXT or LDE RT is the normal employment of the RT as a receiver transmitter Selecting RCU allows the SIP ASIP RT to be used as a remote control device EXT is a capability of the SIP ASIP that allows the radio to be controlled externally via the system connector The ASIP radio is automatically in EXT when proper interface and software is detected Selecting EXT disables the front panel controls of the RT EXT is used for GRM 122 testing LDE stands for local data entry and represents a future
54. Retransmit one radio through another Both RTs are set to RXMT position and connected by an RXMT cable 5 6 11 5820 890 10 8 MODE SWITCH The MODE switch contains three positions for selecting SC or FH mode of operation It also provides an FH M position that controls net sync time and is for use by NCS personnel only Figure 5 3 MODE Switch MODE SWITCH POSITIONS AND USES POSITION PURPOSE SC Selection of the SC position places the radio in the single channel mode of Single Channel operation FH Selection of the FH position places the radio in the frequency hopping mode of Frequency Hopping operation FH M The FH M position used by NCS operators only causes the NCS radio to Frequency Hopping electronically keep all net radios within the plus or minus 4 second window Master required for frequency hopping communications CHAN CHANNEL This control allows the operator to select from among eight SC and six FH channels These preset channels are tuned electronically for ease of operation Net change is accomplished by merely moving the switch from one channel to another Figure 5 4 CHANNEL Switch CHANNEL SWITCH POSITIONS AND USES POSITION PURPOSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 Channel switch positions 1 through 6 are used for SC and or FH nets These channels are routinely loaded with COMSEC keys FH data and sync time as required for unit communications With the correct SC frequency loaded
55. Task 1 Set FCTN to SQ ON and CHAN to one to be offset Press FREQ then OFST then CHG until desired offset is shown RT display Use the following procedure to clear an offset frequency e Set FCTN to SQ ON and CHAN to one to be cleared Press FREQ then OFST then CHG until RT display shows 00 5 7 Scrolling COMSEC Keys DEFINITION USE OF LOADSETS EXAMPLE OF NEED EXAMPLE OF USE SCROLL PROCEDURE The SINCGARS radio allows you to move COMSEC keys about in channels 1 through 5 in both SC and FH modes of communication This movement is called scrolling With normal use of loadsets which align channels and COMSEC keys according to unit needs there is limited requirement to scroll TEKs When you change net ID to contact a station in a division other than your own you will normally need to use that division s TEK You anticipated this need and loaded the additional TEK in your channel 5 the least used net of the loadset To contact the other division you change the net ID in channel 2 and scroll TEK 5 to CHAN 2 Use the following procedure to scroll TEK from one channel to another 1 5 only KEK cannot be moved out of channel 6 e Set CHAN to the channel to be used Press CMSC RT display shows current TEK Press CHG until desired appears If COMSEC alarm is heard press PTT twice to clear it e Changing CHAN switch to another channel automatically returns TEKs to thei
56. USES 3 2b PLGR Characteristics ANTENNA KEY PAD DISPLAY HANDLE 3 2 _ PLGR Physical Data MEASUREMENTS POWER Through global positioning system GPS satellite contact provides accurate location information in various formats Through global position system GPS satellite contact provides accurate time in various formats and for various time zones Primary use is to determine position location secondary use is as the primary source of sync time used in SINCGARS radios The PLGR has a built in antenna that can be swivelled to improve reception The PLGR has a keypad with twelve multifunction keys that are used to control PLGR operation The PLGR display contains four lines of information with 16 characters per line A built in adjustable handle facilitates reading the PLGR display and making keypad entries while holding the device in the hand Length is 24 1 CM 9 5 IN Width is 10 4 CM 4 1 IN Depth is 6 6 CM 2 6 IN For primary power the PLGR uses a 6 volt lithium BA 5800 battery and the memory battery is a 3 6 volt LS 6 lithium battery 11 5820 890 10 8 3 3 FREQUENCY HOPPING MULTIPLEXER FHMUX TD 1456 VRC The multiplexer combines any mix of up to four low to high power frequency hopping SINCGARS transceivers to a single antenna The FHMUX unit operates across the 30 000 to 87 975 MHz frequency range The primary function is to extend the multiplexing capability to frequency hop
57. a FH net in which net operators load all required COMSEC data and sync time from their ANCD and merely the NCS to check into the net The terms used to indicate the capability of data messages to pass automatically from one SINCGARS net to another and from a SINCGARS to an EPLRS net to reach a single addressee or broadcast sub net The SIP ASIP VAA controls internet operations through the software addresses and routing tables stored in its memory The internet capability is available only when the SIP ASIP radios are employed with the FBCB2 system The capability available when packet data mode and the FBCB2 system are used which allows a single SIP ASIP radio to relay a data message to its addressee within the same frequency hopping net After the transmitting station tries unsuccessfully several times to reach the addressee station software in the SIP ASIP VAA causes the intranet relay station to retransmit the message The intranet feature is entirely automatic requiring no action on the part of the intranet relay station operator This represents a future capability and is currently not used Straight line path between two radios that is required for best communications All COMSEC keys FH data and sync time required to load all six RT channels for frequency hopping cipher text mode of communications 11 5820 890 10 8 TERM Lockouts Manual channel frequency Manpack radio Net control station NCS
58. alternate NCS follows the procedure shown in Figure 4 13 also see Primary NCS Task 5 Respond to CUE Calls 1 Note CUE message in RT display 2 Switch from operational channel to CUE 3 Respond on CUE channel in CT mode 4 Direct caller to MAN channel 5 Upon caller s request send ERF on MAN channel 6 Return to operational channel and check communications 7 Immediately displace to new location if enemy is believed to have direction finding capabilities Alt NCS normally responds to CUE calls to preclude NCS displacement Figure 4 13 NCS CUE amp ERF PROCEDURE 4 21 11 5820 890 10 8 4 7 PERIODIC UPDATING 4 7a Keys TEK KEK 4 7b FH Data HOPSET TSK NET ID 4 7 SOI Information DAILY 10 DAYS NO CHANGE DEFINITIONS 4 7d Sync Time NO REQUIREMENT OPERATIONAL Traffic Encryption Key TEK must be updated replaced at least every 30 days Key Encryption Key KEK must be replaced at least every 90 days Hopsets do not require periodic change and may remain unchanged throughout an operation Hopsets may change at any time because of operational requirements Transmission Security Key TSK must be replaced at least every 30 days the same frequency as TEK Net IDS do not require periodic change and normally remain unchanged throughout an operation They may be changed at any time for operational reasons The following SOI item
59. and Vehicular Radios their principal components Single Radio Mounts Control Monitors and remote control units RCU SINCGARS associated items of equipment addressed in this manual include the Automated Net Control Device ANCD Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR Frequency Hopping Multiplexer FHMUX Vehicular Intercommunications Set VIC 1 and Secure Telephone Unit STU when used to transmit classified data from one location to another 1 1 11 5820 890 10 8 OPERATIONS TASKS MAINTENANCE BATTERIES 1 3 GENERAL INFORMATION The Principles of Operation chapter covers how SINCGARS radios and associated equipment are employed to accomplish various communications requirements during unit mission operations Some specific subjects addressed are single channel communications frequency hopping nets use of Julian Date and GPS Zulu time net openings and late net entry methods updating procedures retransmission operations use of antennas remote control operations and frequency management Specific tasks covered in terms of sequential procedures are Operator Primary and Special NCS Primary and Special plus PLGR FHMUX and STU Transfer tasks ANCD tasks are addressed as integral parts of Operator and NCS tasks Operator level maintenance pertaining to SINCGARS radios is treated in the form of Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS Essential operator maintenance requirements for associated equipm
60. are normally available at brigade and higher level Signal Offices for temporary loan to units needing replacement ANCDs Unit SOP should indicate how temporary replacement ANCDs are to be provided to subordinate units ANCD operator maintenance tasks are e Check for frayed cables loose nuts or screws correct seating of connectors and completeness of equipment whenever required e Clean the display window and keypad as necessary for clarity Replace the battery as required basis when prompted by the ANCD LOW BAT message Using a coin or screwdriver remove four screws and battery compartment cover from ANCD Remove the battery housing from the ANCD Remove batteries from the battery housing and replace them maintaining proper polarity Inset t the battery housing into the ANCD again ensuring proper polarity Install the battery cover and tighten screws to a firm setting Turn the ANCD ON and verify that your battery change was successful Figure 9 1 ANCD Battery Replacement 8 21 11 5820 890 10 8 REQUIREMENT PROTECTING STORED DATA IF STORED DATA IS LOST REFERENCES All ANCD users including operators are required to change ANCD battery batteries whenever change is needed Batteries should be changed as soon as feasible after the LOW BAT message appears in the ANCD display window The ANCD will retain stored data for two minutes after the batteries have been removed This give
61. continued RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 5 RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 RT 1523E C U 80063 A3267334 Lever Locking 80063 1 Lever Locking ASIP 80063 A3256669 1 or RADIO SET AN VRC 88A SHORT RANGE DISMOUNT RADIO SET AN VRC 88D RADIO SET AN VRC 88F Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA 1 AM 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 AM 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 AM 7239C VRC 80063 A3245066 1 or AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3267335 CableAssembly Special Purpose W4 80063 A3103735 7 or 1 80063 A3255571 RT to VAA Antenna Manpack AS 3683 PRC 80063 A3132025 1 1 Battery Box 1 CY 8523A PRC 80063 A3018381 1 or CY 8523B PRC 80063 A3132600 1 or CY 8523C PRC 80063 A3249648 1 Handset HRCRD H 250 U 80058 or 1 Handheld Remote Control Radio Device C 12493 U 80063 A3249865 1 1 Carrying Case Radio 1 80063 A3142076 1 80063 A3142076 2 Receiver Transmitter Radio 1 RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 5 RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 RT 1523E C U 80063 A3267334 Lever Locking 80063 1 Lever Locking or Denotes Dismount Components B 6 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF END ITEM Continued 2 Natio
62. control signals provided by the VAA must be connected to the multiplexer one SNAP cable per VAA Vehicular DC power 22 to 32 Vdc must also be supplied to the multiplexer through J2 on the Power Amplifier Mount MT 6353 VRC or through J2 on the Mounting Base MT 6576 VRC The only two operator controls on the multiplexer are the POWER switch and the RADIO PRIORITY switch The POWER switch must be placed in the ON position to use the FXMUX the POWER switch can be turned ON and left ON if the DC power is controlled remotely by CB1 on the VAA ON OFF Figure 3 3 POWER Switch The RADIO PRIORITY switch position is set based on the desired operating scenario In the EQUAL position all four radios connected to the multiplexer will have equal communications priority In the 1A 1B 2A and 2B positions the selected radio will have a slightly higher priority than the other radios whenever there is frequency conflict a frequency conflict is when two or more hopping radios want to communicate on the same frequency at the same instant In the RXMT 1A 1B position radios 1A and 1B operating in the retransmit mode have higher priority than radios 2A and 2B Normally the switch will be set in the EQUAL position but if desired higher priority can be given to a critical communications link f RADIO PRIORITY N 1B 1A Figure 3 4 RADIO PRIORITY Switch The TEST position is used only for Off Line BIT and the switch should n
63. damage to the equipment and is strongly discouraged 8 27 11 5820 890 10 8 8 3e isi ightweight GPS Receiver PLGR Main Power HUB PLGR BATTERIES Batteries used are Lithium Non rechargeable BA 5800 U Nickel Cadmium Rechargeable Rockwell 221 0134 010 AA Alkaline 8 Non rechargeable WB101 AA Lithium 8 Non rechargeable L 91 Lithium Non rechargeable HUB LS6 BA HUB MAIN HUB BATTERIES PLGR MAIN POWER AND HUB BATTERIES Approximate Length of Expected Service TYPE OF USE Sync Time only Automatic Standby Continuous This is the HUB battery PLGRH is used as a source of SINCGARS sync time to include electronic loading of RT when required PLGR is not used for navigation in this computation 8 28 1 2 gt P FORMS DA Form 2028 DA Form 2028 2 SF 361 SF 364 SF 388 FIELD MANUAL FM 11 32 FM 21 11 FM 24 18 TECHNICAL BULLETINS a m o A o m TB 11 5820 890 10 TB 11 5820 890 10 TB 11 5820 890 10 TB 11 5820 890 10 TB 11 5820 890 10 7 TB 11 5820 890 10 TB 11 5820 890 10 TB 11 5820 890 10 1 TB 11 5820 890 10 11 TB 11 5820 890 10 12 11 5820 890 10 8 APPENDIX REFERENCES This appendix lists all forms field manuals technical manuals and miscellaneous publicationreferences in this manual Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms Recommended Change
64. displayed whenever you have your radio in CT and receive a PT message For transmission operation this message tells the RXMT operator who selects RS 232 that an EDM data rate 1200N 2400N 4800N or 9600N must be selected before RS232 transmissions can be started NOTE All SIP ASIP radios using RS232 mode must be set to the same EDM data rate This message is displayed while BIT is running changing to the message GOOD when BIT is successful 11 5820 890 10 8 2 29 RT Physical Data NOTE Weights are in kilograms measurements are in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches All weights are approximate all measurements are maximums Table 2 1 Receiver Transmitter Physical Data 15234 25 3 10 0 27 1 10 7 8 7 3 4 6 9 15 2 s eem 2 21 Common Connections Table 2 2 Common Connections ITEM AUD DATA AUD FILL VAA J4 J5 BTRY BOX AUX ASIP a NN 2 Wire Adapter Handset H 250 cannot be connected to the AUD DATA port when the Packet mode is in use Connecting PLGR to the GPS port 45 412 of the RT or VAA requires a special cable W 4 cable is used to connect the VAA J5 or VAA J4 RT B for Packet data only 11 5820 890 10 8 2 3 MP RADIOS AN PRC 119A D F 2 3a Manpack Radios General NOMENCLATURE The term manpack is the common n
65. equivalent pounds and inches weights are approximate measurements are maximums Table 2 8 Vehicular Radio Physical Data i Mounting Base MB 40 9 11 1 11 7 MT 6352 Series 16 1 15 9 4 3 4 6 20 3 Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 Series Vehicular Antenna AS 3900 SINCGARS Low Profile Antenna SLPA AS 3916 Handset HS H 250 Loudspeaker LS 10 6 LS 671 4 2 Power Amplifier PA 30 7 AM 7238 Series 12 1 Receiver Transmitter RT 1523 d 4 14 7 Receiver Transmitter 25 3 27 1 RT 1523A 10 0 10 7 aa a Receiver Transmitter 25 3 RT 1523B C D 10 0 Receiver Transmitter 25 6 RT 1523E 10 1 Control Monitor 11 8 C 11291 4 6 2 30 11 5820 890 10 8 2 51 Vehicular Radio Performance Data Table 2 9 Vehicular Radio Performance Data DATA SR RADIO HIGH Hl 600 4800 BPS 3KM to 5KM 16000 BPS 1 KM to 3 km DATA LR RADIO POWER AMPLIFIER 600 2400 BPS 4800 BPS 16000 BPS EDM DATA LR RADIO POWER AMPLIFIER 1200N 2400N BPS 20 KM to 4800 BPS PCKT 15KM to 9600N BPS 10KM to EDM DATA SR RADIO HIGH Hl 1200N 2400N BPS 4800N BPS PCKT 9600N BPS Ranges shown are for planning purposes only They are based upon line of sight and are average for normal conditions Ranges depend upon location sighting weather and surrounding noise level among other factors Use of the OE 254 antenna w
66. for desired PWR setting d Set RT Mode Press MENU until MODE Display reads SC FH FHM 2 Press CHG for desired MODE e Set COMSEC Press MENU until CMSC Display reads PT CT TD RV 2 Press CHG for desired CMSC setting f Set Backlight Place RT on SQ Backlight lights 4 settings Low to Press FREQ Backlight High then OFF Press CHG until desired setting Default Settings VOL 5 CHAN 1 PWR LO MODE FH 5 29 11 5820 890 10 8 5 44 Load Single Channel Frequencies into RT Primary Operator Task 1 DESCRIPTION The SINCGARS operator is required to perform this task in preparation for the employment of single channel communications participation in Cold Start net openings use of the CUE and ERF method of late net entry and for single channel frequency updates The operator determines the required single channel frequencies from the ANCD or another source These frequencies are then loaded into the radio by use of the RT keyboard DETAILED FLOWCHART Operators perform the actions shown for each subtask in the order shown below Results are shown as ANCD display messages dark bordered boxes or as RT display messages in the form of Display shows LOAD SINGLE CHANNEL FREQUENCIES INTO RT SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Obtain required CUE MAN 1 Turn ANCD ON select and or SC freqs Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Impd Set C s Find Memo 3 Ent
67. illuminate switch to ON continuously and the four BIT FAULT indicators should illuminate for approximately five seconds after power on and then extinguish upon successful completion of the self test The POWER ON indicator should stay illuminated b SET RADIO PRIORITY Get Net Priority strategy Set RADIO PRIORITY to EQUAL to give all RTs equal communications priority OR Set RADIO PRIORITY to desired RT 1A thru 2B to give highest priority to a single RT OR Set RADIO PRIORITY to 1A 1B if RT 1A and RT 1B are in the retransmit mode and they are to have higher priority than RTs 2A and 28 11 5820 890 10 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 11 5820 890 10 8 8 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE IN THIS CHAPTER SINCGARS RADIO MAINTENANCE a General b d ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT OPERATOR MAINTENANCE PMCS for Control Receiver Transmitter RCU PMCS for Control Monitor C M Vehicular Intercom VIC Loudspeaker LS 671 Automated Net Control Device ANCD AN CYZ 10 Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR AN PSN 11 Frequency Hopping Multiplexer FHMUX Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD a b d e f g h BATTERY REQUIREMENTS General Manpack Radio RCU Main Power Manpack Radio RCU Hold Up Battery HUB Automated Net Control Device ANCD Main Power Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR Main Power HUB 8 1 SINCGARS RADIO MAIN
68. in this position an operator with a non FH radio is able to contact a frequency hopping net This position may be used for another SC net if desired MAN The Manual position is required for sending and receiving the Cold Start net Manual opening ERF This position also may be used for another SC net 5 7 11 5820 890 10 8 RF PWR RF POWER POSITION This control allows the operator to adjust the level of radio frequency RF power and related range of operation Basic rule is to use the least amount of RF power needed to communicate with other stations Figure 5 5 RF PWR Switch RF POWER SWITCH POSITIONS AND USES PURPOSE LO Low Power Medium Power HI High Power PA Power Amplifier DIM CONTROL VOL WHSP Provides voice operational range of approximately 200 400 meters This positron 15 used extensively by units in closely deployed situations Actual range is dependent upon weather position line of sight Interference and various other factors Provides voice operational range of approximately 400 meters to 5 kilometers Manpack radio operators can conserve battery life by selecting lowest effective RF power setting Provides voice operational range of approximately 5 to 10 kilometers and data transmission range of 1 to 5 kilometers the latter depending upon data rate BPS as well as the other factors cited under LO above This setting applies only to vehicular long
69. is encountered and you are unable to correct the problem Wherever a check does not have an entry in this column problems should be corrected if possible but do not make the radio not mission capable In performing your PMCS it may be necessary or at least helpful to refer to the many graphics task performance procedures and explanations found elsewhere in this operator s manual Proper performance of PMCS steps requires that you have been trained as an operator know how to make best use of your Manual and Pocket Guide and have had at least some experience with the radio Although these PMCS are not difficult to perform they do require an understanding of operator tasks and procedures 11 5820 890 10 8 8 1 PMCS for SINCGARS Radios PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR SINCGARS RADIOS Before During After Before During After ltem to Check Service CONTROLS RF PWR CHAN MODE FCTN DIM COMSEC VOL CB1 VAA CABLES RF W2 RF CG 3855 RF CG 3856 Audio Data w4 PA Power CX 13303 ANTENNAS AS 3683 AS 3900 AS 3916 AS 4266 Operator Procedure Check for cracked or broken controls Check for loose controls Check for frozen controls Check for missing control knobs Check for missing cables Check for proper installation Check tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cables Check for proper installation Check for proper grounding
70. message is to be sent via RS 232 not designated by comm program or unit SOP Select EDM rate to be used for RS 232 See below for steps required to transmission select EDM data rate Using computer prepare data message to be sent or load your computer with data Check net to ensure that traffic is not Need clear net to ensure that data heard or noted by signal display message goes through Follow communication program Control is from computer SIP ASIP procedures to send and receive data radio serves as data communications messages carrier Both sending and receiving stations must use the same or compatible Xmodem communication program Anyone of the four enhanced data rates are used for RS 232 traffic 1200N 2400 4800N and 9600N BPS Selection is based primarily upon the distance between stations For shorter ranges fast rates work well For longer ranges slower data rates perform better If data is sent through an RXMT site RXMT radios must be set to the same EDM data rate as the outstations Select data rate using PC data transfer software i e Procomm connect PC to RT via data cable Select RS 232 on RT press ENTER on PC PC should indicate the RT connected at xxxx the PC rate you selected If a problem is encountered repeat above steps If voice mode has priority of use in your net it may be necessary to wait for a quiet period to send data messages Pressing PTT will not interupt data
71. mode Press RCV in coordination with STU sender N A Proper STU keys 2400 BPS PT CT voice checked select Soi Radio sUpervlsor Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time receive Ancd Cfd Stu Pc Mx Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod Connect to STU and press RCV WAIT N A Receiving final data Transfer successful Loadset database key or Eset may be selected for the STU transfer Time cannot be transferred by STU The term MWOD is used in loading the Have Quick radio found in selected aircraft Do not press RCV until sending station is ready to press SEND 11 5820 890 10 8 7 3e Send information From ANCD to ANCD via STU STU Task 3 DESCRIPTION This task permits an NCS or communications specialist to transmit SOI information by telephone classified or unclassified from an ANCD at one location to an ANCD at another location Proficiency of the sender and receiver in the employment of the STU 15 a prerequisite for performance of this and the following STU task DETAILED FLOWCHART SEND SOI INFORMATION FROM ANCD TO ANCD VIA STU SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Coordinate SOI transfer 1 Contact receiver N A by STU 2 Coordinate STU Proper STU keys 2400 BPS transfer preparations PT CT voice checked b Prepare ANCD for STU 1 ANCD ON select transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter 01 qRef Group Net sufX Pyro
72. net may be opening in PT if communication security is not a consideration but use of CT for net opening is recommended as the best course of action If you are unable to contact your NCS or the NCS fails to contact you switch back to the MAN channel and standby for the NCS to contact you on that channel 5 52 11 5820 890 10 8 5 54 Receive Net Update from NCS Special Operator Task 4 DESCRIPTION This task is performed when there is a requirement to change or update some element of FH data and the operational situation makes it impossible or impractical to disseminate the new data by physical connection of ANCD to ANCD In such cases the NCS alerts net operators that they are to receive a net update ERF Operators then change the RT FCTN from SQ ON to LD remaining on the operational channel The NCS sends the ERF on the operational channel not on MAN as during a Cold Start net opening Once the net update ERF has been sent the new data may be made effective immediately or stored for later implementation ERF Broadcast and OTAR constitute the means by which FH data SOI information and COMSEC key TEK only can be transferred electronically from one location to another DETAILED FLOWCHART SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare to receive net 1 Stay on the operational N A update ERF channel 2 Set FCTN to LD b Receive and store net 1 Standby for NCS to send update ERF net update ERF 2 Note signa
73. of up to four SINCGARS vehicular radios from a single antenna Specific guidance regarding the FHMUX will be added to this manual when the system has been approved for fielding and firm procedures have been developed By connecting the STU to an ANCD it is possible to transfer COMSEC keys FH data and SOI information over commercial or military telephone circuits for unlimited distances This capability enhances SINCGARS operations for widely dispersed units and it could be especially useful during mobilization of Reserve Component forces 7 2 PLGR TASKS 7 2a Definition of PLGR Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED TM 11 5820 890 10 8 There are four PLGR tasks which enable a SINCGARS NCS to make use of PLGR based GPS Zulu time for net openings and maintaining exact SINCGARS sync time for the duration of operations however extended they may be These four PLGR tasks Involve reading Julian Date and Zulu time from the PLGR manually loading PLGR time into an ANCD electronically loading GPS time directly from the PLGR into a SINCGARS radio and loading required keys into the PLGR from an ANCD NCS personnel and operators having ready access to a PLGR should become proficient in PLGR tasks 7 26 Summary of PLGR Tasks PLGR TASK 1 PLGR TASK 2 PLGR TASK 3 PLGR TASK 4 Obtain Date and GPS Zulu Time from PLGR This task allows an NCS or operator having a PLGR to obtain Julian Da
74. radios with proper FH data Including RXMT net ID 3 RXMT crew moves to RXMT location sets up OE 254 antennas establishes RADIO C to RADIO A and RADIO D to RADIO B communications 4 When ready installs an RXMT cable between RADIO C and RADIO D sets RADIO C and RADIO D to RXMT sets RADIO D to FH M and RADIO C to FH and sets COMSEC of both radios to CT for monitoring 5 RXMT communications between RADIO A and RADIO B are now established Figure 4 20 FH NET TO FH NET RXMT SC PROCEDURE 5 SC PROCEDURE SC DISADVANTAGE EDM RXMT MIXED MODE TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The procedures for FH net to SC net RXMT communications are the same except that RADIO D uses RADIO B s SC frequency and may have to be placed in PT mode if the RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio is used The procedures for SC net to SC net RXMT communications are the same except that both RADIO C and RADIO D use SC frequencies and both RXMT radios may have to be placed in PT mode if the RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio is used Whenever SC transmissions are required there is the possibility that the enemy can locate the RXMT site by using direction finding techniques In operational situations where the enemy 15 believed to have direction finding capabilities an RXMT station should displace as frequently as necessary Operating in the EDM mode any rate a SIP ASIP RXMT station will pass all EDM SDM and voice traffic
75. range radios using a power amplifier Approximate voice range provided is 10 to 40 kilometers data range of about 5 to 25 kilometers dependent upon the data rate being used and various other factors This control enables the operator to adjust the level of brightness of the RT display Turning the knob clockwise increases the level of light turning it counterclockwise dims the display light When using night vision goggles DIM is to be set fully counterclockwise The Volume Whisper control enables the operator to adjust the audio level Turning knob clockwise increases level and counterclockwise decreases it The whisper feature is activated by pulling out on the VOL knob In the WHSP position the operator can speak softly whisper and the message will be heard at a normal audio level Figure 5 6 DIM Control Figure 5 7 VOL WHSP 11 5820 890 10 8 COMSEC SWITCH The COMSEC switch provides five settings for control of RT COMSEC mode Only the CT position is normally used in field operations Two of the positions require the operator to pull out on the knob to move into out of these settings Figure 5 8 COMSEC Switch COMSEC SWITCH POSITIONS AND USES PURPOSE PT This setting places the radio in plain text not secure mode To prevent Plain text accidental selection of this position the operator must pull out on the knob to enter or leave the setting The radio must be set to the PT position whe
76. responsibilities include Ensuring all net members have the correct COMSEC key FH data and sync time for net operations Opening the net at the prescribed time to support unit mission requirements Knowing which net operators have and have not entered the net Transmitting or at least pressing PTT often enough to ensure that net sync time is maintained Ensuring that CUE calls are answered Controlling access to the net Employing RXMT capabilities when required Verbally assisting operators having trouble with task performance Ensuring that administrative communications requirements do not interfere with unit mission control communications Making full use of alternate NCS operators to preclude distraction from primary NCS requirements 4 12c Role of the Alternate NCS NET OPENING UPDATES CUE CALLS DISPLACEMENT NUMBER While the NCS sets the time of opening and logs stations into the net it is the Alternate NCS who follows up and brings all late entry operators into the net When net data is updated whether electronically or by physical distribution it is the Alternate NCS who maintains a radio on old data and ensures that all net operators make the transition successfully It is the Alternate NCS who responds to all CUE calls leaving the primary NCS free to control the net Also it is the Alternate NCS who physically changes positions shortly following each use of SC communications to prevent enemy
77. situation in which to use this method Is again where the operator is reasonably certain that sync time is the problem Another factor is that the operator may not be willing to wait for traffic to be heard passive method and elects this method to re enter the net as quickly as possible There are three procedures by which sync time can be reloaded 1 Repeat ICOM fill that includes sync time Procedure is the same as that described in Figure 4 7 Primary Operator Task 2 Load COMSEC FH Data Sync Time into RT Using ICOM Fill 2 Connect a PLGR to the RT and transfer GPS time See PLGR Task 3 Load PLGR Date and GPS Zulu Time in SINCGARS RT for detailed procedure 3 Determine correct GPS time from PLGR or ANCD clear and load new Julian Date clear and load new hours and minutes Press STO at the time seconds are the same in the source device and the RT Newly loaded sync time should be within one second of source time otherwise try again See Figure 4 11 below Subtasks c and d of Primary Operator Task 3 Perform Hot Start Net Opening for detailed procedures Obtain running GPS time from ANCD or PLGR Press TIME on RT display shows DD Press CLR on RT display shows 2 Enter correct Julian Date display shows XX Press STO on RT Julian Date is stored Press TIME on RT display shows HH MM Press CLR on RT display shows _ _ i Enter GPS HH display shows
78. switch may remain in FH position to change net ID Sync time may be loaded electronically from an Automated Net Control Device ANCD a Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR manually via the keypad or by ERF Running self test with COMSEC in PT results in display message of GO CT Changing to CT clears message RT will accept ERF if sync time is less than 100 days different from net sync time New keypad with SIP features GPS connector Figure 2 5 RT 1523C Features RT 1523D Control knobs are affixed with side positioned Phillips screws RT cover is affixed with Phillips screws All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator RT Mode switch may remain in FH position to change net ID Sync time may be loaded electronically from an Automated Net Control Device ANCD a Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR manually via the keypad or by ERF Running self test with COMSEC in PT results in display message of GO CT Changing to CT clears message RT will accept if sync time is less than 100 days different from net sync time New keypad with SIP features GPS connector Figure 2 6 RT 1523D Features 11 5820 890 10 8 RT 1523E Reduced size and weight Internal battery Increased battery life Enhanced display Backlight selectable Only one front panel switch Spare slots for future enhancements Enhanced self test BIT RT Mode switch may remain in FH position to c
79. to all of the vehicular radio components Depending upon unit policy selected operators will probably draw ANCDs already loaded with proper COMSEC keys FH data and sync time for current unit operations When unit SOP calls for centralized control of ANCDs the operator is advised when and where to obtain ANCD support Operators are expected to properly assemble manpack radios and install required vehicular radio components in preparation for net opening This includes connecting cables antennas handsets loudspeakers and any other components that are to be used CAUTION YOUR RT CAN BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER ATTACHMENT OF MANPACK ANTENNAS 1 To avoid damage turn the sleeve only not the antenna 2 Turning the antenna can destroy the antenna connector in the RT 11 5820 890 10 8 PMCS STATUS 5 4 After completing radio assembly operators perform their Before Operation Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS as shown in Chapter 8 Performing PMCS involves checks of controls cables antennas power source self test keypad data loading and ability to communicate By performing PMCS the operator is assured that all components of the radio are working properly or that something needs to be fixed by the operator or unit maintenance The PMCS charts found caper aI should be followed exactly in the performance of PMCS No operator action will pay greater dividends Upon completion of Before Operation PMC
80. to determine if it is the source of your problem If it is change your location remote your antenna or RT or try to place an obstacle between you and the interfering station Press your PTT two times Net should clear Advise NCS of your action Press your PTT two times Net should clear Advise NCS of your action Free up PTT or replace handset with a known good one Identify interfering radio and request operator to reduce RF PWR setting move your radio at least 50 meters or remote your RT or antenna Advise NCS of your action 11 5820 890 10 8 6 CONTROL STATION NCS TASKS IN THIS CHAPTER 6 1 GENERAL 6 2 NCS RESPONSIBILITIES PRIMARY NCS TASKS a Definition of Primary NCS Tasks b Summary of Primary NCS Tasks c Transfer Partial COMSEC FH Data ANCD to ANCD Primary NCS Task 1 6 7 4 Transfer COMSEC Key from ANCD to RT NCS Option IA Designate New Default Loadset NCS Option 1B f Change Eset in One Channel NCS Option 1C g Transfer Selected SOI Information ANCD to ANCD Primary NCS Task 2 Conduct Hot Start Net Opening Primary NCS Task 3 6 14 Conduct Cold Start Net Opening Primary NCS Task 4 6 j Re
81. to view item 99INDIVA LST DI 2 Press ENTR to select Connect to STU and press data item SEND WAIT d Send data by STU 1 Ensure receiving station is Both STUs must be placed in transfer ready for you to send secure data mode 2 Press SEND Sending final data Transfer successful 4 Loadset database key or Eset may be selected for STU transfer Time cannot be transferred by STU The term MWOD multiple word of day is used in loading procedure for the Have Quick radio found in selected aircraft iu Do not press SEND until receiving station is ready to press RCV see STU Task 2 for details 11 5820 890 10 8 7 34 Receive COMSEC Keys FH Data Into ANCD via STU STU Task 2 DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART This task enables an NCS or communications specialist to receive and store in an ANCD those COMSEC keys and FH data classified or unclassified sent from another location via STU over telephone lines RECEIVE COMSEC KEYS FH DATA INTO ANCD VIA STU ACTIONS RESULTS SUBTASKS a Coordinate STU transfer 1 Receive initial call from sending station 2 Coordinate STU transfer preparations b Prepare ANCD for STU transfer 1 Turn ANCD ON 2 Enter RADIO 3 Enter RECEIVE 4 Enter STU 5 Enter Loadset Database Key Eset as desired c Receive COMSEC FH data by STU transfer Ensure you are ready for sender to press SEND Place your STU in secure data
82. traffic Doing so merely stops the receipt of traffic at your radio 6 63 11 5820 890 10 8 5 7 OTHER OPERATOR PROCEDURES 5 7a Battery Life Condition Indicator MANPACK RADIOS DURING ASSEMBLY IF USED BATTERY IN COMBAT FOR TRAINING RECORDING USAGE 5 64 Manpack and dismount radios are battery powered A Battery Life Indicator built into the SINCGARS RT will give you an estimate of battery usage which you must convert into an estimate of remaining battery life During radio assembly note if the main power battery is new or used If it is used note the number written on the side of the battery If battery IS used upon completion of radio assembly load battery life indicator number on side of battery No action required if battery is new e Set FCTN to LD press BATT note 00 in display press CLR enter battery life indicator number and press STO Battery life Indicator of used battery has now been entered into the RT During radio operation you can determine an estimated status of main battery power by following these steps e With at SQ ON press BATT and read battery life indicator e reading of 11 or higher may mean that your main battery is nearing exhaustion This reading is at best a estimate based on usage computations by the RT During combat and operational missions you may want to replace the main battery when the battery life indicator reads 11 or higher for
83. while ANCD screens continue to be shown as dark bordered rectangles A battery powered PLGR will automatically go to standby as soon as satellites have been acquired kk Time Figure of Merit TFOM of 8 or less indicates that PLGR is tracking at least satellite and PLGR time is GPS accurate For TFOM 9 wait for PLGR to acquire satellites at which time TFOM will change from 9 to 8 or less When first turned on the PLGR may take as long as 15 minutes to acquire satellites When the date read from the PLGR is entered the ANCD it is automatically converted to the two digit Julian Date needed for SINCGARS sync time 11 5820 890 10 8 7 24 Manually Load PLGR Date and Zulu Time Into ANCD PLGR Task 2 DESCRIPTION This procedure enables an NCS or SINCGARS operator to manually load the date and time obtained from the PLGR into the ANCD GPS date and Zulu time can then be transferred to other ANCDs and loaded into SINCGARS radios using the ICOM fill procedure DETAILED FLOWCHART MANUALLY LOAD PLGR DATE AND ZULU TIME INTO ANCD SUBTASK ACTIONS RESULTS a Determine GPS date Perform PLGR Task 1 and Zulu time as shown above Read date and time 2124 43Z from PLGR with TFOM 25 12 94 of 8 or less Speed too slow GS 1 mph b Prepare ANCD for Turn ANCD ON select loading date and time Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SUPERVISOR Are you authorized to use this feature Y N 3 Respond YE
84. with Single Radio Mount SRM components SINCGARS associated tasks cece eee eee ee 7 1 SINCGARS low profile antenna SINCGARS radio maintenance 8 1 SINCGARS Receiver Transmitter RT occ cece neces 2 2 Single channel SC communications oo cece eee 4 4 E EE TT EE e A RETIRO E E TEENS 4 5 Required usage 4 5 Single Radio Mount SRM Radio 2 32 Performancedata 2 34 amp 1 ud 2 33 5 51 __ 2 8 SIP AASIP BI oteren bi sn 2 8 i po 2 9 Special Net Control Station NCS tasks 6 18 Definition of tasks Ace Summary of tasks 6 18 Special operator TASKS 5 42 Definition of tasks 5 42 Summary of TASKS 5 43 Special operator tasks SIP ASIP Start up procedure 5 3 Index 7 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Technical ota 2 8 Traffic Encryption Key e
85. your vehicle will clear a power line stop before you get close to the power line and either carefully tie down the antenna or if neces sary remove the antenna to make sure that you can safely drive under the power line During cross country operations do not allow anyone to stick an arm leg or weapon over the sides of the vehicle If your antenna accidently touches a power line individuals who are in contact with vegetation or the ground could suffer death or sever injury For additional safety information refer to TB 43 0129 Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment 11 5820 890 10 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 11 5820 890 10 8 TECHNICAL MANUAL HEADQUARTERS No 11 5820 890 10 8 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY Washington DC 1 DECEMBER 1998 SINCGARS GROUND COMBAT NET RADIO ICOM MANPACK RADIO AN PRC 119A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9482 EIC L2Q SHORT RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO AN VRC 87A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9480 EIC 122 SHORT RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO WITH SINGLE RADIO MOUNT AN VRC 87C NSN 5820 01 304 2045 EIC GDC SHORT RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO WITH DISMOUNT AN VRC 88A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9481 EIC 123 SHORT RANGE LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO AN VRC 89A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9479 EIC 124 LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO AN VRC 90A D F NSN 5820 01 268 5105 EIC 125 SHORT RANGE LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO WITH DISMOUNT AN VRC 91A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9478 EIC 126 SHOR
86. 0 8 4 2 SINGLE CHANNEL SC COMMUNICATIONS 4 2 Capabilities DEFINITION FREQUENCIES CHANNELS LOADING SINCGARS is a single channel radio in that it can transmit or receive on only one channel at a time Single channel or the SC mode of operation refers to the fact that only one frequency is being used for communications The SINCGARS radio will operate on 2320 different frequencies in the range of 30 000 to 87 975 MHz with a 25 KHz separation between frequencies Eight single channel frequencies can be loaded into a SINCGARS RT one in each numbered channel 1 6 plus one each in the CUE and MAN channels SC frequencies are loaded via the RT keypad Although a matter of command policy operators are normally required to load only those SC frequencies they are expected to need during mission operations To load SC frequencies use the procedure shown i Figure 4 2 below Also see Primary Operator Task 1 Load Single Channel Frequencies into SINCGARS 1 Set FCTN switch to LD MODE to SC 2 Select CHAN 1 6 CUE or MAN 3 Press FREQ then CLR 4 Enter 5 digit frequency 5 Press STO 6 Repeat for each channel to be loaded Figure 4 2 HOW TO LOAD SC FREQUENCIES 11 5820 890 10 8 4 25 Limitations of SC Communications LOCATING JAMMING 4 2c Required Usage COLD START CUE PROCESS When using the SC mode of communication it is important to remember that
87. 01 382 6869 5995 01 244 0016 5995 01 286 2701 5995 01 303 0308 5995 01 312 7932 5995 01 379 9743 5995 01 365 2519 5995 01 323 9033 5995 01 335 7878 5995 01 348 2264 5995 01 387 4422 5995 01 379 9689 TBD TBD 5810 01 026 962 5935 01 462 6624 Strap Assembly Hand 80063 A3274735 1 Data Transfer Device AN CYZ 10 ANCD 98230 Loudspeaker LS 671 VRC 80058 Radio System LS 685 U 80058 RCU ONLY Cable Assembly Special Purpose CX 13292 VRC 80058 50ft VAA to LS 671 CX 13292 VRC 80058 100ft VAA to LS 671 CX 13298 VRC 80058 A3014033 1 5 in CX 13298 VRC 80058 A3014033 2 15 ft CX 13308 VRC 80058 AN PSG 2 2A 5 Adapter Cable CX 13310 VRC 80058 HYX 57 Adapter Cable CX 13311 VRC 80058 MST 20 Adapter Cable CX 13312 VRC 80058 AN PSC 3 Adapter Cable CX 13402 VRC 80058 TACFIRE Magic Cable CX 13404 VRC 80058 KY 90 Adapter Cable CX 13417 VRC 80058 Splitter Cable CX 13465 VRC 80058 Digital Adapter Cable CX 13467 VRC 80058 ANCD Fill Cable 18 in CX 13490 VRC A3210567 8 ft FA Extender Cable Cable Special Purpose SIP ASIP RT to PC Adapter HYX 57 TSEC 98230 ON241760 Adapter 2 wire ASIP INSTALLATION KIT ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MK mounts AN VRC 87A D F throught AN VRC 92A D F Radio Sets and Ancillary equipment in vehicles 80063 REFER TO DA PAM 25 30 FOR LISTINGS OF INDIVIDUAL KITS 11 5820 890 10 8 APPENDIX REFERENCE DATA Nomencla
88. 254 antenna will increase ranges for both voice and data transmissions Enemy jamming and mutual interference conditions will degrade ranges In data transmissions use of lower baud rate increases the range 2 34 11 5820 890 10 8 2 7 CONTROL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER 11561 C U 2 7a Components MODE CHAN SWITCH DISPLAY RF PWR SWITCH SWITCH SYSTEMS CONNECTOR SPKR SWITCH SPKR CONNECTOR J2 FCTN SWITCH DIM CONTROL AUD FILL CONNECTOR 93 COMSEC voi wHSP AUD DATA SWITCH GoNTROL CONNECTOR J4 NOTE Handset Battery Box and LS 685 Loudspeaker are issued with the RCU LS 685 U LOUDSPEAKER CRYSTAL Control Receiver Transmitter RCU C 11561 C U Battery Box CY 8523A B Handset H 250 Loudspeaker LS 685 Figure 2 21 Components of Control Receiver Transmitter RCU This is the only loudspeaker that can be used with the RCU speaker connector 2 35 11 5820 890 10 8 2 76 Physical Data NOTE Weights are kilograms measurements are centimeters The numbers parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches All weights are approximate all measurements are maximums Table 2 12 RCU Physical Data Control Receiver Transmitter 11561 CY 8523A B 9250 Loudspeaker 5 685 2 7 Performance Data DISTANCE The RCU is co
89. 3 A3018860 5 RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 or RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 RT 1523E C U 80063 A3267334 Lever Locking 80063 Lever Locking ASIP 80063 A3256669 1 RADIO SET AN VRC 87C SINGLE RADIO MOUNT Adapter Power Supply PSA MX 10862 VRC 80063 A3018352 1 Cable Assembly Special Purpose CX 13314 VRC 80063 A3142069 1 Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 5 Denotes Dismount Components B 10 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Ill BASIC ISSUE ITEMS There are no BIl items associated with SINCGARS Radio Configurations 11 5820 890 10 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 11 5820 890 10 8 APPENDIX ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION C4 This appendix lists additional items you are authorized for the support of Radio Sets AN PRC 119A D F and AN VRC 87A D F through AN VRC 92A D F and AN VRC 87C 2 GENERAL This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the radio set and that do not have to be turned in with it These items are all authorized to you CTA MTOE TDA or JTA C 3 EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS National stock numbers descriptions and quantities are provided to help you identify and request the additional Items you require to support this equipment The items are listed in name and grouped into equipment types SECTION 1 ADDIT
90. 4 VAA Connectors A B models VAA Connectors C D models Cabling Vehicular Radio Physical Data Vehicular Radio Performance Data 11 5820 890 10 8 SINGLE RADIO MOUNT RADIO SRM a SR Radio with SRM Components AN VRC 87C b SRM Radio Physical Data c SRM Radio Performance Data CONTROL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER RCU C 11561 C U a Components b Physical Data c Performance Data CONTROL MONITOR CM C 11291 VRC C 11291A VRC 1 2 37 a Components 2 37 b CM Physical Data C Performance Data LOUDSPEAKER LS 671 15 671 Components b 15 671 Physical Data 15 671 Performance Data 2 1 SINCGARS RECEIVER TRANSMITTERS RT RT 1523 SERIES 241a RT Capabilities SINGLE CHANNEL Single channel SC frequency modulation FM operation in very high frequency VHF band of 30 000 to 87 975 Megahertz MHz FREQUENCY HOPPING Frequency hopping FH mode for electronic counter counter measure ECCM operation PRESET CHANNELS Preset channels eight for SC mode and six for FH mode each of which may be loaded with COMSEC and used in CT or PT mode DIGITAL TUNING Quick silent precise digital tuning VISUAL DISPLAY Electronic visual displays provide for quick checks and prompts SELF TEST BIT Built in test BIT provides self test for fast checking of equipment condition VOICE DATA Voic
91. 561 RCU or SIP RTs used as RCUs Power connector couples vehicle 27 5 VDC power to the intercom 2 5 Cabling HANDSETS RT A LOWER SHELF RT B TOP SHELF COMPUTER FSK DEVICES HRCRD 11 5820 890 10 8 Connected only to the AUD DATA or AUD FILL port of the SIP RT they will not operate if connected to the SIP ASIP VAA Use of a W4 cable from the RT AUD DATA port to the VAA J5 connector is required only for Packet data mode The RT A antenna is connected with a W2 cable from the RT antenna port to the PA connector Use of a W4 cable from the RT AUD DATA port to the VAA J4 connector is required only for Packet data mode The RT B antenna is connected from the antenna port directly to the antenna for short range radios and from the RT antenna port to the auxiliary PA J2 connector using cable CG 3855 3856 for RT B long range radios Connected to the AUD DATA port of the SIP ASIP RT Do not attempt to connect your computer to the VAA it will not work without FDCB2 software installed in the computer and tactical internet software installed in the VAA TacFire and other FSK data devices are connected directly to the AUD DATA port of the RT not to the VAA Connected to AUD DATA or AUD FILL on RT and to 6 pin connector on battery box CY 8523C 2 29 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5k Vehicular Radio Physical Data NOTE Weights are in kilograms measurements are in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show
92. ADIO A and RADIO C are frequency hopping while RADIO B and RADIO D operate in the single channel mode RADIO A and RADIO C use the same FH data RADIO B and RADIO D use the same SC frequency An FH message entering RADIO D reaches RADIO B as SC traffic A SC message entering RADIO C reaches RADIO A as FH traffic Although there should be little need for this mode of RXMT operation it is available if required In this case RADIO A and RADIO C operate on a SC frequency that is at least 10 MHz different from that used by RADIO B and RADIO D Net ID and SC frequencies used in RXMT operations are obtained from your SOI or unit SOP At the RXMT site maximum results are attained by using two OE 254 antennas separated as far as cabling will permit The least satisfactory results will be obtained if two installed antennas on the same vehicle are used 4 29 11 5820 890 10 8 4 9c RXMT Procedures NCS DESIGNATIONS ELECTRONIC UPDATES In that the illustrative situation makes RADIO A an NCS RADIO C will always operate in the FH position Because RADIO B is an outstation in RADIO A s net RADIO B also operates in the FH mode RADIO D an RXMT radio operates in the FH M position and serves as NCS for the two station net consisting of RADIO B and RADIO D OTAR and Broadcast transmissions Will pass through an RXMT installation but data Will not If it is necessary to send net FH data to RADIO B electronically break the RXMT l
93. AM 1780 2 Commander and Crewmember Control Box C 2298 3 Driver Control Box C 2297 Figure 3 6 Components of AN VIC 1 Intercommunication Set 3 5b VIC Capabilities AM 1780 The audio frequency amplifier is the main junction box for the VIC 1 system It provides control of DC power to associated control boxes and to the radio system connected to the AM 1780 amplifier It also amplifies and controls audio signals in the intercom and radio circuits C 2298 C 2297 When a combat vehicle crew CVC helmet cord is connected to a control box the crewmember can select by means of the MONITOR switch and CVC controls to communicate on the intercom or on a radio 3 5c VIC Physical Data TM 11 5820 890 10 8 NOTE Measurements in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show equivalent inches All measurements are maximums MEASUREMENTS AM 1780 MEASUREMENTS C 2297 C 2298 Height is 9 6 CM 3 8 IN Depth is 14 6 CM 5 8 IN Width is 24 6 CM 9 7 IN Height is 11 4 CM 4 5 IN Depth is 14 6 CM 5 8 IN Width is 8 9 CM 3 3 IN 11 5820 890 10 8 3 6 HANDHELD REMOTE CONTROL RADIO DEVICE HRCRD The new Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD C 12493 U is used with manpack radio AN PRC 119A D F and the dismount kits of vehicular radio configurations AN VRC 88A D F The HRCRD enables the manpack operator to control the following functions of the radio using the HRCRD Channel RF Power Mode and
94. ANCD the PLGR key is immediately transferred Ignore this reference to the RT only the ANCD are involved in this task 11 5820 890 10 8 7 3 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU TASKS 7 3a Definition of STU Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT S INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED 7 3b Summary of STU Tasks STU TASK 1 STU TASK 2 STU TASK 3 STU TASK 4 There are four STU tasks which enable an NCS or communications specialist to transfer classified data over unlimited distances via commercial or military telephone circuits COMSEC keys FH data hopsets TSK and net IDs and SOI information can be sent from ANCD to ANCD via a STU transfer It is assumed that the NCS or communications specialist performing these tasks is fully qualified in the employment of the STU for sending and receiving classified information Only the four tasks shown below involving use of the ANCD with the STU represent required training Send COMSEC Keys FH Data From ANCD to ANCD Via STU This task allows an NCS or communications specialist to send classified COMSEC keys and FH data from an ANCD at one location to an ANCD at another location regardless of distance by commercial or military telephone Receive COMSEC Keys FH Data Into An ANCD Via STU This task enables an NCS or communications specialist to receive and store in an ANCD the COMSEC keys and FH data sent from another ANCD by telephone Send SOI Informa
95. Both RXMT SIP ASIP radios must be set to the EDM data rate being used by the operational net When passing RS 232 traffic the equivalent EDM data rate must be set in both RXMT radios Mixed mode SC to FH and FH to SC cannot be used in the EDM mode This is not a limitation because nets having SC only do not have EDM capabilities When mixed mode RXMT communications are required the solution is to use an SDM mode 4 31 11 5820 890 10 8 4 10 ANTENNAS 4 10 Long Manpack Antenna AS 4266A SOURCE The long manpack antenna is issued as a component of the manpack and dismount radios Seb Appendix this manual for authorization details EMPLOYMENT The long manpack antenna is designed to augment the short antenna in situations where additional range is required and your situation permits use of a long antenna WARNING Before employing the long antenna during operations or training be 4 32 sure you understand the safety precautions WARNING DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR IF THE ANTENNA COMES INTO CONTACT WITH OVERHEAD POWER LINES Never fully extend the long antenna directly under power If you must fully extend the long antenna near power lines power line pales or towers or buildings with overhead power line connections never come closer than two times the antenna height from the base of the power line pole tower or building Stop before you get close to the power line and check for cleara
96. By loading one active loadset 30 days three active SOI editions 30 days one reserve loadset 30 days and two reserve editions into unit ANCDs there are three results The unit has all the active data loadset and SOI it needs for 30 days At the end of 30 days the unit changes to the reserve loadset and the last SOI edition and continues to operate without interruption The unit then has another thirty days during which to reload ANCDs with new loadsets and SOI editions in the same proportion By making full use of the ANCD memory capacity it is thus possible to minimize the impact of periodic updating on operational units With an update requirement only every 30 days and a thirty day period in which to accomplish the update there should be little or no impact on mission operations 4 23 11 5820 890 10 8 4 8 ELECTRONIC UPDATING 48 Sending by Over The Air Rekey Procedures RESTRICTION TWO WAYS MANUAL KEYING AUTOMATIC KEYING AK SENDING MK OTAR 4 24 Only TEK may be transmitted over the air using the OTAR procedure KEK may be distributed by physical means only There are two procedures by which aTEK may be sent over the air One is called Automatic Keying AK the other is Manual Keying Mk The MK OTAR procedure allows an NCS to transmit a TEK from a source ANCD through the SINCGARS radios to one or more target ANCDs This is a useful form of OTAR in that
97. C keys COMSEC key will not load in RCU 11 5820 890 10 8 temto Operator Not Fully Mission Check Service Procedure Capable If Before COMM CHECK During SC Mode Check for sidetone Sidetone is not heard After FH Mode Check ability to change RT Cannot change RT Plain Text channel from RCU channel from RCU Cipher Text Check voice comm Cannot communicate Voice SC PT and FH CT in SC PT FH CT Data Check SQ OFF while in SC voice mode mode from RCU If data comm is mission Cannot communicate required check data comm in mission required in FH CT using data mission related data mode using mission device related data device Check intercomm capability between RCU and radio Does not function proper y means that a control will not do what it is intended to do for example turning the FCTN knob does not change the radio s function t may be necessary to wait until Item 7 Communications Checks to determine for sure that some controls do or do not function proper y Damaged and cannot be used meansthat after visual inspection or operational check you determine that a piece of equipment for whatever reason is faulty and will not support your mission requirements or presents a safety hazard Use of the ICOM fill procedure is appropriate here but COMSEC keys are loaded into the RCU Skip steps if unit SOP or tactica
98. ERATIONS SYMPTOM POSSIBILITIES ACTIONS You hear no traffic and you are not Your handset could be stuck Press PTT several times to free up transmitting SIG display is lit and producing a hot mike mike If necessary replace shows a signal higher than LO situation handset with known good one You are being jammed In SQ If feasible try to place an obstacle OFF you hear strong static or between you and the enemy random noise When antenna Notify your supervisor and if is disconnected SIG display appropriate prepare a MIJI drops and noise disappears or feeder report is reduced Your RT is faulty or locked up Set RT FCTN to STBY position With handset and antenna and then back to SQ ON If disconnected your SIG display problem continues contact your remains lit and above LO unit maintenance You hear random radio traffic Your You are experiencing friendly or Set RT FCTN to SQ OFF and try SIG display is lit and shows a enemy radio interference to communicate Change to a signal higher than LO longer range antenna If feasible try to place an obstacle between you and the source of interference Advise NCS of your problem You may or may not hear any You are probably experiencing Set RT FCTN to SQ OFF and you noise SIG display goes on and off enemy sweep jamming hear noise or static each time the at regular intervals or in random SIG display lights If feasible try order to place an obstacle between you
99. ERF method of late net entry should be used DETAILED FLOWCHART PERFORM PASSIVE LATE NET ENTRY SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Note that no traffic is Try to contact the NCS or There IS no response to your calls being heard on the net another net station b Prepare radio for passive 1 Press FREQ on RT RT display shows late net entry keypad 2 Press SYNC on RT RT display shows LF keypad c Allow RT to make 1 DO NOT press PTT while Rt display Will continue to automatic adjustment RT is in this mode show LF 2 Wait until you hear traffic RT will drop L from display on the net will read XXX again d Re establish contact with Call NCS and re enter Passive method of late net entry is net NCS the net completed If traffic is not heard after using the Passive Late Net Entry method for three minutes or so use the Hot Start procedure or CUE and ERF method of late net entry 5 36 11 5820 890 10 8 5 41 Obtain SOI Information from ANCD Primary Operator Task 5 DESCRIPTION Because the ANCD replaces the paper the operator performs this task whenever SOI information on nets suffixes pyrotechnics smoke or sign countersign is required As many as 40 Quick Reference QREF items can be made available to the operator in list form Full SOI information is readily available for all QREF entries Up to five time periods 24 hour days may be included in each QREF file
100. Even so these times offer the using unit a basis for planning battery requirements SCOPE Approximate length of expected service is stated for each item and version of equipment using the proper battery for each Item 8 3b Radio RCU Main Power MAIN POWER Main power batteries used in the manpack radio and RCU are Battery Non Rechargeable Lithium BA 5590 U Battery Rechargeable BB590 U Battery Rechargeable BB390 U Note The BB390A U requires the following items for recharging PP8444A U universal portable charger and a BB 390 adapter J 6358 P A 24 volt vehicular cable is available for the PP 8444A U See AAL for NSN s Only the Non Rechargeable BA 5590 is used in the following charts MANPACK BATTERY MANPACK RADIO MAIN POWER BA 5590 Approximate Length of Expected Service RF PWR in VOICE DATA amp 1523 RT 1523A D RT 1523B C RT 1523E pem NW we Operator usage rate is defined as 9 minutes of receiving monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting on average NCS usage rate is defined as 2 minutes of receiving monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting on average 8 25 11 5820 890 10 8 BATTERY RCU MAIN POWER BA 5590 Approximate Length of Expected Service RF PWR in VOICEIDATASFH amp CT VOICE DATA amp CT VOICEDATA FH amp CT O
101. IN THIS CHAPTER GENERAL PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR TASKS a Definition of PLGR Tasks b Summary of PLGR Tasks c Obtain Date and GPS Zulu Time from PLGR PLGR Task 1 d Manually Load PLGR Date and Zulu Time Into PLGR Task 2 Load PLGR Date and GPS Zulu Time Into SINCGARS RT PLGR Task 3 f Load PLGR Key from ANCD into PLGR PLGR Task 4 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU TASKS Definition of STU Tasks Summary of STU Tasks Send COMSEC Keys FH Data From ANCD to ANCD via STU STU TASK 1 tuner E Receive COMSEC Keys FH Data Into ANCD Via STU STU Task 2 Send SOI Information From ANCD to ANCD via STU STU Task 3 7 14 Receive SOI Information Into ANCD via STU STU Task 4 7 16 FREQUENCY HOPPING MULTIPLEXER FHMUX TASKS 7 17 11 5820 890 10 8 7 1 GENERAL SCOPE PLGR FHMUX STU This chapter addresses three items of equipment associated with SINCGARS operations The PLGR in addition to its primary function of determining position location serves as the principal source of correct Julian Date and exact GPS Zulu time for SINCGARS net sync time Julian Date and GPS Zulu time can be downloaded from the PLGR by direct connection to the RT or by manually loading PLGR time into an ANCD with subsequent loading of the RT from the ANCD Additionally the ANCD can be used as the source of required PLGR keys FHMUX is a development item which when fielded will allow operation
102. ING a Sending TEK by Over The Air Rekey OTAR Procedures b Sending FH Data by Electronic Remote Fill Process c Sending SOI Information by Broadcast Method RETRANSMISSION RXMT OPERATIONS amp General eee ue t e dedi a b RXMT Capability Modes RXMT Procedures ANTENNAS a Long Manpack Antenna 5 4266 b SINCGARS Low Profile Antenna SLPA AS 3916 OE 254 MA wha de EC REMOTING CAPABILITIES Use ot ROU css sx n cR sec n E pa usd ed n aha Rama Use of RT as Use of LS OZ1 Use of Control Monitor Use of Wire Line Adapter HYX 57 Use of Remote Control Device C2329 GRA 39 a Discipline b Role of the c Role of Alternate NCS laaan anaana cece nee d Special Task Performance Operator Proficiency f M
103. IONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST 0 2 3 National Stock Description Number CAGEC and Part Number U M Antenna Manpack 5985 01 340 1043 AS 4266 PRC 80063 A3167657 1 extended range or 5985 01 425 7305 AS 4266A PRC 80063 256531 1 Bar Latch Locking Lever 5340 01 430 4723 Bar Latch 80063 A3256492 5340 01 456 7985 Bar Latch ASIP 80063 A3256669 1 Batteries 6135 01 214 6441 Battery Non rechargeable BA 5372 U Lithium hold up 80058 6135 01 036 3495 Battery Non rechargeable BA 5590 U Lithium manpack primary power 5135 01 063 3918 Battery Rechargeable BA 590 U 80058 5140 01 419 8187 Battery Rechargeable BA 390 U Manpack primary power 80058 6135 01 462 4442 Case Battery Assembly 80063 A3272554 1 3130 01 427 9604 Charger Manpack Battery PP 8444 5940 01 427 9710 Adapter AP 390 5940 01 427 9395 Adapter Cable 24 VDC 5935 01 462 6624 Adapter Connector 2Wire 80063 A3272557 1 Control Receiver Transmitter 5895 01 277 2680 C 11561 C U 80058 Initially issued with the following components LS 685 U 1 ea Battery Box CY 8523A PRC or CY 8523B PRC 1 ea and Handset H 250 U 1 ea This issue is at time of SINCGARS fielding only As Required 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION 11 ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST continued 1 2 National Stock Description Number CAGEC and Part Number 5340 01 461 4741 5810 01 343 1194 5965 01 222 1420 5965 01 295 1125 5995 01 358 1078 5995
104. IS stored 3 Press ERF on RT Display shows SEND keypad e Make communications 1 Wait for distant station 20 30 seconds should be adequate check RT B to store the ERF 2 Call RT B and confirm Obtain ACK from all operators who that ERF was received were to receive the ERF 5 58 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS f Resume normal 9 Change MODE from MODE from Important to get out of FH M after communications FH M to FH sending the ERF 2 Set FCTN to SQ ON N A KKK 3 Continue FH CT Task of send an ERF is complete communications Any radio may be used but in preparing for an RXMT mission use of RT D is recommended Use of RT D 2 Figure 5 21 minimizes the possibility of interfering with net sync time Once RXMT operations begin RT D must be set to FH M as shown in Special Operator Task 6 The best rule to follow is do not transmit in the FH M position except to send an ERF and for RT D during RXMT operations If common data and sync time being used an alternate procedure is for RXMT operator to contact RT B on a secure FH channel and request RT B operator to change to a specified net ID for purpose of RXMT operation 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5k Change Net ID Special Operator Task 8 DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART This Special Operator Task is performed when there is a requirement to communicate with
105. KT can be used only with the FBCB2 hardware and software system RT random access memory RAM location where data is stored and used data in permanent memory may be retrieved if desired retention of data in permanent memory depends upon main power or HUB battery Hand held device providing GPS time for use as sync time in SINCGARS radios Those operator and NCS tasks which are essential to adequate job performance Feature of SINCGARS radio that enables SC or FH traffic to automatically pass from one RXMT RT to another thus increasing the effective range to that of two radios Feature of SINCGARS radio that search all SC channels for traffic cannot be used in the FH mode of operation Procedure by which a TEK may be move from one RT channel to another does not apply to key stored in channel 6 Mode of communication using one designated frequency System Improvement Program Special tasks Updating Vehicular radios Zero TM 11 5820 890 10 8 DEFINITION Process by which army materiel managers systematically improve equipment capabilities to meet established operational requirements The SIP ASIP radio is a product of a SINCGARS System Improvement Program Those operator and NCS tasks which may be required in job performance these tasks entail additional training to achieve operator proficiency Electronic or physical procedures by which COMSEC FH data and SOI information are changed performe
106. M Continued 2 National Stock Number 5820 01 267 9478 5820 01 420 6621 5820 01 451 8249 5965 00 043 3463 5895 01 432 8370 5820 01 322 3477 5895 01 461 4505 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5340 01 430 4723 5340 01 456 7985 5820 01 267 9477 5820 01 421 2605 5820 01 451 8250 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5895 01 195 4844 5895 01 306 8093 5895 01 407 2627 5975 01 235 1962 5995 01 222 4209 5995 01 219 7025 5995 01 304 2026 5995 01 310 0335 5995 01 426 6728 9 Description CAGEC and Part Number RADIO SET AN VRC 91A LONG SHORT RADIO SET AN VRC 91D RANGE DISMOUNT RADIO SET AN VRC 91F continued Handset HRCRD H 250 U 80058 or Handheld Remote Control Radio Device C 12493 U 80063 A3249865 1 KKK Carrying Case Radio 80063 A3142076 1 80063 A3142076 2 Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 5 RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 RT 1523E C U 80063 A3267334 Lever Locking 80063 Lever Locking ASIP 80063 A3256669 1 RADIO SET AN VRC 92A LONG RANGE LONG RANGE RADIO SET AN VRC 92D RADIO SET AN VRC 92F Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA AM 7239 VRC 80063
107. N TO SAFETY USING A DRY WOODEN POLE OR A DRY ROPE OR SOME OTHER INSULATION MATERIAL SEND FOR HELP AS SOON AS POSSIBLE AFTER THE INJURED PERSON IS FREE OF CONTACT WITH THE SOURCE OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK MOVE THE PERSON A SHORT DISTANCE AWAY AND IMMEDIATELY START ARTIFICIAL RESUSCITATION 11 5820 890 10 8 WARNING A lithium sulfur dioxide Li SO battery used with Battery Box CY 8523 series contains pressurized sulfur dioxide SO gas rotten egg smell The gas is toxic and the battery MUST NOT be abused in any way which may cause the battery to rupture DO NOT heat short circuit crush puncture mutilate or disassemble the battery DO NOT USE any battery which shows signs of damage such as bulging swelling disfigurement brown liquid in the plastic wrap a swollen plastic wrap etc DO NOT test Li SO batteries for capacity except as authorized DO NOT recharge Li SO batteries DO NOT use water to extinguish Li SO battery fires If the battery compartment becomes hot to the touch if you hear a hissing sound i e battery venting or if you smell irritating sulfur dioxide gas rotten egg smell IMMEDIATELY TURN OFF the equipment Remove the equipment to a well ventilated area or leave the area DO NOT use a Halon type fire extinquisher on a lithium battery fire In the event of a fire near a lithium battery ies rapid cooling of the battery ies is important Use a carbon dioxide CO extinguishe
108. NOTE Weights are in kilograms measurements are in centimeters parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches measurements are maximums TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The numbers in All weights are approximate Table 2 10 Physical Data Single Radio Mount Radios Mounting Base Electrical Equipment MT 6576 SRM Power Supply Adapter PSA MX 10862 High Voltage Center Fed Antenna AS 3900 SINCGARS Low Profile Antenna SLPA AS 3916 Handset H 250 Loudspeaker LS LS 671 Battery Tray CY 8664 Selected configurations only Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523 Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523A Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523B LENGTH 32 4 12 8 29 8 11 7 286 6 112 8 209 9 82 6 WIDTH 29 2 11 5 27 4 10 8 HEIGHT 12 3 4 8 12 6 5 0 N WEIGHT 5 3 11 5 4 1 9 0 5 3 11 6 2 4 5 3 0 25 0 55 1 1 2 4 6 7 147 6 9 15 2 6 2 13 7 2 33 11 5820 890 10 8 2 6c Performance Data for Single Radio Mount SRM Radio Table 2 11 Performance Data Single Radio Mount Radios TYPE COMM RF PWR RANGE 600 4800 HIGH 16000 BPS Ranges shown are for planning purposes only They are based upon line of sight and are average for normal conditions Ranges depend upon location sighting weather and surrounding noise level among other factors Use of the OE
109. OEL B HUDSON Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 05842 DISTRIBUTION To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number IDN 369784 requirements for TM 11 5820 890 10 8 U S GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1999 710 117 80152 073599 000
110. OM ATTN AMSEL LC LM LT Fort Monmouth New Jersey 07703 5007 Pee eee meme merece eee ee GALLO lt ew eee ee ee eee eee ene ee ee eae 9 G DOTTED LINE rere crete estes cee TEAR WA PUBLICATION NUMBER 11 5820 890 10 8 BE EXACT PIN POINT WHERE IT IS PAGE PARA FIGURE TABLE NO GRAPH NO NO PRINTED NAME GRADE OR TITLE AND TELEPHONE NUMBER DA 2028 2 RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS SOMETHING WRONG ruis PUBLICATION FROM PRINT YOUR UNIT S COMPLETE ADDRESS DATE SENT PUBLICATION DATE PUBLICATION TITLE OPERATOR S MANUAL SINCGARS 1 December 1998 GROUND COMBAT NET RADIO ICOM IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT THEN JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM CAREFULLY TEAR IT OUT FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL SIGN HERE PREVIOUS EDITIONS PS IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR ARE OBSOLETE RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS REVERSE OF 2028 2 FILL iN YOUR UNIT S ADDRESS FOLD BACK DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY SS RA SY 9 5 MAIL OFFICIAL BUSINESS U S Army CECOM ATTN AMSEL LC LM LT Fort Monmouth New Jersey 07703 5007 14 1 31100 DNOIV
111. OMSEC keys FH data and sync time stored in the ANCD it is necessary to transfer data from one ANCD to another If such transfers are not made by communications specialists or designated NCOs operators must be able to perform this special task DETAILED FLOWCHART Operators perform the actions required in each subtask in the order shown Results are shown as ANCD displays dark bordered boxes or as RT displays in the form of RT display shows Where appropriate results are expressed as explanations of occurrences SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare Source ANCD for 1 Source ANCD ON select COMSEC FH transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter SEND send to Radio Ancd Stu PC 4 Enter ANCD Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod b Enter DATABASE Do you want to include time Y N 6 Respond YES Connect to ANCD and press SEND WAIT b Prepare Target ANCD for 1 Turn Target ANCD ON select COMSEC FH transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter RECEIVE receive Stu PC Mx 5 45 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS 4 Enter ANCD Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod 5 Enter DATABASE Do you want to delete FH and COMSEC data Y N 6 Respond YES Connect to ANCD and press RCV WAIT c Transfer COMSEC FH Press SEND
112. PLGR into a SINCGARS radio It represents the preferred method of loading sync time into an RT when a PLGR is available especially for NCS personnel ELECTRONICALLY LOAD PLGR DATE AND GPS ZULU TIME INTO RT SUBTASKS a Prepare PLGR to perform transfer task ACTIONS RESULTS Turn PLGR ON Observe PLGR perform its self test Note this PLGR screen appear Press PLGR MENU key two times note this screen Press PLGR right arrow four times to highlight SINCGARS Press PLGR down arrow to select SINCGARS Press PLGR left arrow to highlight ACTIVATE Do NOT press down arrow yet FIX 18T WK 82223 EL 00027m DATA XFR DOP CALC SINCGARS FOM 5 MGRS New 63528n 1 4 P SV SEL ALERTS KOI 18 lt more gt P DATA XFR DOP CALC SINCGARS SINCGARS Start time fill ACTIVATE SINCGARS Start time fill ACTIVATE SV SEL ALERTS KOI 18 lt more gt P QUIT 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS b Prepare RT for time 1 Connect PLGR to RT N A transfer from PLGR AUD FILL port 2 Set RT FCTN to LD N A c Perform date time 1 Press down arrow to SINCGARS transfer from PLGR to FIT select ACTIVATE Press LOAD key on radio QU Press LOAD on RT SINCGARS time fill successful QUIT Press PLGR down arrow to select QUIT Date time transfer is completed 11 5820 890 10 8 7 2f Load PLGR Key From ANCD In
113. QREF brings to the display a list of up to 40 specific SOI items selected from NET SUFX PYRO or C S Once the QREF file has been entered scroll up or down to locate the SOI item desired Additionally all SOI information associated with each of these QREF Items is available by returning to the SOI menu shown above and entering GROUP TMPD SET FIND or MEMO 3 The following are examples of SOI information which may be available in a full SOI file a GROUP Enter Group and scroll to the SOI item desired Group qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo TO1 Set 52ID DEM 003 003 52ID SPT 5 38 11 5820 890 10 8 b Enter Net and scroll to the SOI item desired Net qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 06 1 4 FA BN W7T C81975 M74800 0424 TO1 1 41 ADA CMD Y1Z Callwrd BULLDOG Cal word is obtained by pressing right arrow then left arrow to return to NET display c SUFFIX Enter sufX and scroll to the SOI item desired sufX qRef Group Net sufx Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Commander 02 COFS XO 27 Expanders are found at the end of suffixes d PYRO SMOKE Enter Pyro and scroll to the SOI item desired Pyro qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo GREEN SMOKE Safe to land or drop supplies here Meaning of GREEN SMOKE can be obtained bypressing right arrow then left arrow to return to Pyro menu You may scroll through signals o
114. R process This task supplements Special NCS Task 3 Send TEK to Other NCSs Using MK Method of OTAR RECEIVE AND STORE TEK SENT BY MK METHOD OF OTAR SUBTASKS a Prepare radio for receipt of MK OTAR ACTIONS RESULTS 1 Set FCTN to SQ ON N A 2 Set COMSEC to CT N A 3 Set DATA to OFF N A b Prepare ANCD to receive MK OTAR 1 Turn ANCD ON select Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter COMSEC Ld Rv Ak Mk vU 4 Enter RV Connect to RT Press RCV WAIT 5 Connect ANCD to RT N A AUD FILL port 6 6 ACK to Source NCS when Responds to Source NCS s ready to receive OTAR MK OTAR instructions 6 29 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Receive and store TEK 1 When NCS directs go to Load in Progress sent by MK OTAR chan 6 and press RCV Enter Text ID gt 9999999999999992 2 Enter Text ID provided by Do you want to skip Tag Source NCS sequence Y N 3 Enter YES 1 Keys Received Do not press RCV until directed to do so by the Source NCS Tag Sequence involves many questions to which you will probably not know the answer Use Tag Sequence only when specifically directed to do so by the Source NCS who will then provide answers to the many questions involved Otherwise respond YES to skip the Tag Sequence 6 30 11 5820 890 10 8 CHAPTER 7 SINCGARS ASSOCIATED TASKS
115. RATION REMOTE FUNCTIONS 4 38 Only those functions which differ from the radio are described below Speaker Switch turns loudspeaker ON and OFF volume is controlled by the RCU VOL control which deactivates the loudspeaker when set to WHSP mode FCTN TST position provides self test of both RCU and radio FCTN ICM position allows RCU and radio operators to talk over connecting field wire when COMSEC is set to PT CHAN switch enables RCU operator to select channel 1 6 CUE or MAN for the companion radio SIG display lights at RCU when radio receives signal For RT 1523 is displayed when the radio receives signal HUB indicator shows status of RCU HUB only radio HUB must be checked by radio operator BATT button checks status of RCU manpack battery when pressed once checks manpack radio battery status when pressed a second time CALL button enables operator to create a tone and CALL message at companion radio by setting FCTN to ICM and pressing CALL and PTT at the same time With radio FCTN set to REM the radio operator can call the RCU operator my merely pressing the CALL button and PTT at the same time The following functions can be performed by the RCU operator located up to 4 KM away from the radio Single channel frequencies may be loaded and offset ERFs may be sent and received Radio MODE may be changed SC FH FH M Radio FCTN may be changed radio will tran
116. RD HUB LOW VOL WHSP AUD DATA SPEAKER FUNCTION DIM HOLD UP VOLUME WHISPER AUDIO DATA BATTERY LOW Figure 5 15 RCU FRONT PANEL 11 5820 890 10 8 5 34 Automated Net Control Device ANCD Controls KEYPAD The ANCD keypad provides the operator a 35 button keypad for communications with the ANCD The function of each key is briefly explained below Figure 5 16 ANCD Keypad ANCD KEYPAD BUTTONS AND USES A thru Z Pressing these keys enters letters of the alphabet when LOCK LTR key is activated 0 thru 9 Pressing these keys enters numbers when LOCK LTR key is deactivated LAMP This key activates internal ANCD light for use with night vision goggles lamp is not intended for use with naked eye 5 19 11 5820 890 10 8 BUTTON RCV Receive ABORT Abort TI gt Battery CLR Clear DELE Delete P DN Page Down SPACE LOCK LTR Lock Letter ENTR Enter PURPOSE This key is used in combat emergency situations to delete all data from the ANCD DO NOT use the ZERO key for routine deletion of data Pressing this button returns ANCD display to the main menu provides a quick and easy way to return to the start point of your procedure Will take operator to the RDS main menu if RDS is the default application not your starting poi
117. RT display is the primary means by which the radio communicates with its operator Figure 5 9 RT Display RT DISPLAY SIGNALS AND USES PURPOSE Signal strength is shown as a lighted vertical bar at the left side of the RT display window the higher the bar the stronger the signal Activation of this bar advises the operator that traffic is on the net or that an ERF or OTAR message has entered the radio Continuous activation of the signal display bar is an indication of enemy jamming or friendly interference When the Hold Up Battery HUB becomes weak a diamond shaped light at the right side of the RT display will flash if the HUB is dead or missing this light will remain on This light appears only while the RT display is active Some versions of the SINCGARS radio display an near the right side of the RT display indicating that traffic is being sent over the net Examples of some of the information the operator will receive from the RT are 53550 SC frequency 1 COMSEC key STO Store where F123 net ID FAIL 5 Need to go to CT RT 1523 only 5 10 11 5820 890 10 8 RT keypad also referred to as a keyboard provides one of the primary means the operator has for entering information into the radio It also allows the operator to obtain information from the radio The function of each of the 20 keypad buttons is briefly described below Very s
118. RXMT All data rates except PCKT be retrans with the following provisions 1 SDM data TF and AD1 No change to normal retrans procedures Radios do not have to be set in Data mode data off Mixed radios at RXMT site or outstations is permitted 2 EDM DATA Radios at the RXMT site have to be set to the same EDM data rates as outstations Only SIP radios can be used at the RXMT site and outstations SPECIAL TASK 7 SPECIAL TASK 8 SPECIAL TASK 9 SPECIAL TASK 10 5 44 Send an ERF as Part of RXMT Operation This task is required only as a part of RXMT operations In some situations it may be necessary for the RXMT operator to send an ERF to the distant station before retransmission can be started Any operator held responsible for performing Special Task 6 should also be trained in this task Change Net ID When contact with a non loadset not loaded in radio Channel 1 through 6 station is desired the operator needs to be able to change to the net ID of the desired station Use SIP RT as an RCU Allows the operator to use the SIP RT as either a Manpack RCU or remoted radio Send Data Via RS 232 Mode Allows the operator to use any one of four enhanced data rates to transmit and receive data messages using RS 232 mode 11 5820 890 10 8 5 56 Transfer COMSEC Keys FH Data Sync Time ANCD to ANCD Special Operator Task 1 DESCRIPTION During preparations for net opening and during periodic updating of C
119. S WARNING This could cause data loss 4 Press down arrow Are you sure you want to continue 5 Respond YES Appl Date Time Setup Util Bit 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASK ACTIONS RESULT c Load new date and time 1 Enter DATE Date is Sat 12 24 1994 New mm dd yy 2 Enter new date in Date is Sat 12 24 1994 form of mm dd yy New mm dd yy 12 25 94 ENTR 8 Press ENTR Appl Date Time Setup Util Bit MAIN 4 Enter TIME Time is 14 53 27 New hh mmiss Time is 14 53 27 New hh mm ss 21 25 00 ENTR 5 Enter new time in form of hh mm ss 6 Press ENTR when Appl Date Time Setup PLGR reads 25 00 Util Bit MAIN 7 Enter APPL SOI RADIO RD 8 Enter RDS select Soi Radio sUpervlsor Enter one minute beyond PLGR time and wait until PLGR seconds reach 00 to press ENTR on ANCD Because the ANCD requires time to load you may find that pressing ENTR on the ANCD when PLGR time reads 59 gives you a more accurate entry To check the accuracy of your ANCD time entry enter RADIO then TIME You can then read ANCD time in running format and compare it with running PLGR time If the two times are more than one second different reload PLGR time into your ANCD 11 5820 890 10 8 7 2e Electronically Load PLGR Date and Zulu Time Into RT PLGR Task 3 DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART This procedure allows an NCS or SINCGARS operator to transfer date and time directly from directly from a
120. S actions the operator is ready to load the radio with data and enter the net The first three of the five Primary Operator Tasks provide detailed procedures for doing just that 11 5820 890 10 8 5 3 CONTROLS 5 3a SINCGARS Receiver Transmitter RT Controls GENERAL The SINCGARS radio has seven controls plus the RT keypad and display for the operator to use Several of these controls are used infrequently but they are available when required Each control is described below See RT front panel graphic for the location of each ANT RF CHAN SIG AUD FILL ANTENNA RF POWER CHANNEL SIGNAL DISPLAY COMSEC AUDIO FILL gt a aN RXMT FOTN Mt DIM KEYBOARD VOL VOLUME AUD DATA RETRANSMIT FUNCTION WHISPER AUDIO DATA Figure 5 1 SINCGARS RT FRONT PANEL Some control positions found on the RT front panel are enclosed in a box To move the control into or out of these positions the operator must pull out on the control knob These controls are spring loaded and will return to normal position when released 5 5 11 5820 890 10 8 FUNCTION This is the primary control with which the operator determines what function the radio is to perform The FCTN switch has nine positions as described below Figure 5 2 FCTN Function Switch FCTN CONTROL POSITIONS AND USES POSITION PURPOSE OFF All power IS shut off all stored data COMSEC FH syn
121. SE Compatibility Role of Signal OfficersINCOs 4 1 SECURE CIPHER TEXT COMMUNICATIONS 41 Integrated COMSEC ICOM BUILT IN COMSEC SINCGARS ICOM radios have COMSEC capability built in to the RT All that is required to achieve secure cipher text communications is to load the required COMSEC key COMSEC ALARM The RT 1523 A B COMSEC alarm beeping sound must be cleared by pressing PTT twice in order to load COMSEC keys or continue normal operations The RT 1523C D E will generate a constant tone and display NOKEY PLAIN TEXT CALLS When a station operating in CT receives a call from a station using plain text PT the radio inserts a soft beeping alarm over the message to let the receiving operator know that the incoming message is not secure 11 5820 890 10 8 41b Traffic Encryption Key KEY CHANNELS COMPATIBILITY SCROLLING 4 1 Cipher Text Operations PURPOSE POLICY EASE OF USE A traffic encryption key TEK enables the SINCGARS radio to operate in a secure cipher text CT mode of communications The TEK is loaded into the SINCGARS RT from an ANCD or other COMSEC fill device if desired A TEK may be loaded into all six channels of the RT or channel 6 may be reserved for OTAR use covered below Normally the same TEK is loaded into all five or six channels but any TEK may be loaded into an
122. SIG COMSEC AUD FILL sPkR RF POWER cyan RECEIVE SIGNAL HOLD UP A008 FLU SPEAKER CHANNEL 1 DISPLAY BATTERY COVER AUD T LU 5 MODE KEYBOARD HUB LOW VOL WHSP AUD DATA SPEAKER FUNCTION DIM HOLD UP VOLUME WHISPER AUDIO DATA BATTERY LOW Figure 4 23 RCU FRONT PANEL 4 35 11 5820 890 10 8 CONFIGURATIONS The RCU may be used in conjunction with a SINCGARS radio in any of the following configurations Dismounted to manpack radio Figure 4 24 below R BINDING BINDING TUNE p POSTS POSTS PAN en Um TWO WIRE 7 irs MA tA Figure 4 24 DISMOUNTED RCU TO MANPACK RADIO Dismounted RCU to vehicular radio See Figure 4 25 below E1A E2A BINDING POSTS TWO WIRE Figure 4 25 DISMOUNTED RCU TO VEHICULAR RADIO 4 36 11 5820 890 10 8 e Vehicular mounted located VAA to manpack radio Sed Figure 4 26 below E1A E2A OR E1B E2B BINDINGPOSTS Figure 4 26 VEHICULAR MOUNTED RCU TO MANPACK RADIO e Vehicular mounted to vehicular radio See Figure 4 27 below e d es LS 685 U Figure 4 27 VEHICULAR MOUNTED RCU TO VEHICULAR RADIO 4 37 11 5820 890 10 8 OPE
123. SINCGARS Data Rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 and 16 000 BPS and Enhanced Data Rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS The RS 232 interface allows transmission of data via SINCGARS ASIP radios using computers and commercial Xmodem software If not using Packet PCKT data mode or the internet controller INC feature of the ASIP radio all data devices must be connected to the AUD DATA port not to the ASIP VAA J2 AUD FILL Handsets used with the ASIP RT may be connected to the AUD DATA or AUD FILL connector NOTE Handsets will not function if connected to the front of the ASIP VAA 1 Antenna RF Input Output 2 11 11 5820 890 10 8 2 21 Messages CALL Fail 5 Fail 6 GOPT GOTST NOGPS NOKEY RX SETDR WAIT This message appears in the display of a remoted radio when an RCU RT operator presses the CALL key and at the RCU RT when the remoted radio operator presses the CALL key If your radio has been set to EXT as an option of the RCU key menu an EXT message will be displayed All RT front panel controls except COMSEC are disabled Unless you want to use the EXT feature use the RCU key to turn EXT mode off The ASIP RT is always in an EXT mode as long as it detects proper interface and software EXT will not be displayed If a Fail 5 message is displayed during power up and BIT it means one
124. SIP radio for voice and SINCGARS data modes but it cannot be used for enhanced data modes An attractive feature of the SIP ASIP RT is the ability to load GPS time from an attached PLGR using the very simple procedure The SIP ASIP RT contains an internal FSK detector circuit for use with the AD1 and data rates Use of a special CX 13808 U DMD interface cable is no longer necessary In addition TACFIRE devices must be cabled directly to the SIP ASIP RT AUD DATA connector 5 13 11 5820 890 10 8 SIP ASIP RT Keypad General The keypad of the SIP ASIP radio is similar to that of earlier versions except four of the keys have been given new designations RCU GPS SA and CID The ASIP keypad adds a MENU and Backlight function Each is explained below FREQ 1 ti ERF DATA OFST 4 E CHG F TIME 7 CLR LOAD STO BATT CLR LOAD STO BATT 0 CALL MENU 0 CALL 1 KEYPADS RCU 2 The RCU key is used to select operating mode options of RT RCU EXT or LDE RT is the normal employment of the RT as a receiver transmitter Selecting RCU allows the SIP ASIP RT to be used as a remote control device EXT is a capability of the SIP ASIP radio that allows the radio to be controlled externally via the system connector The ASIP radio is automatically in EXT when proper Interface and software IS detected Se
125. T 1 10 Enter QUIT Connect ANCD to RT 11 Press down arrow Press LOAD on RT 12 Press LOAD STO 6 Transfer in Progress 1 Keys Transferred Do not press SEND until net members acknowledge readiness to receive the AK OTAR Alternate NCS keeps radio on o d TEK and KEK sends AK OTAR to net members who missed original transmission as contact is established If Alternate NCS has a second radio new TEK should be loaded into that radio for monitoring of net traffic after original AK OTAR is sent For ASIP The sent key is automatically placed in the radio Temp Register and applied to the operational channel This allows instant communication on new TEK NCS simply changes channel out then back into operational channel to contact any operator who did not receive the AK The in out step places NCS RT back to original TEK Load new into operational channel because that is where it is stored net members radios 6 28 11 5820 890 10 8 6 44 Receive and Store Sent by MK Method of Special NCS Task 5 DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART This task is performed by Target NCSs when a Source NCS electronically transmits a TEK using the MK method of OTAR This procedure allows Target NCSs to store the new TEK in their ANCDs for physical distribution to net operators when required The sending NCS directs receiving NCSs to perform this task as an integral part of the MK OTA
126. T 051 CB1 CONTROL MONITOR CONNECTOR J9 REMOTE CONTROL BINDING POSTS E1A E2A E1B E2B PA B CONTROL CONNECTOR J11 Figure 2 18 VAA Connectors 2 25 11 5820 890 10 8 2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 E1 2A B P1 1 0 1 RF PA Control RT A provides control lines and power supply for the RF Power Amplifier AUD DATA B provides for connection of handset or data device for RT B AUD DATA A provides for connection of handset or data device for RT A DATA B 6 pin connector used to couple VAA J4 to RT B AUD DATA port using a W 4 cable W 4 cable must be connected for use of J2 connector DATA A 6 pin connector used to couple VAA J5 to RT A AUD DATA port using a W 4 cable W 4 cable must be connected for use of J3 connector SPKR 6 pin connector used to connect LS 454 loudspeaker RT B System Connector 27 pin system connector for RT B RT A System Connector 27 pin system connector for RT A Control Monitor 6 pin connector for use of a control monitor C 11291 SNAP not used RF PA Control RT B 14 pin connector for control of external RT B power amplifier Two wire binding posts used for remote control of RT A RT B via C 11561 RCU or SIP RTs used as RCUs Power connector couples vehicle 27 5 VDC power to the intercom ON OFF Switch Power indicator lamp 11 5820 890 10 8 VAA Connectors C D models 2 51 a N a
127. T RANGE LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO A N VRC 92A D F NSN 5820 01 267 9477 EIC L27 USED WITH AUTOMATED NET CONTROL DEVICE ANCD AN CYZ 10 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR AN PSN 11 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU FREQUENCY HOPPING MUTIPLEXER FHMUX This manual supersedes TM 11 5820 890 10 8 dated 28 February 1995 11 5820 890 10 8 m co loo NI MN iO gt N gt m ko joo IN foo lal foe SUBJECT PAGE INTRODUCTION 1 1 ERNST TOTO TTE 1 1 unica aac oder 1 1 General Information 1 2 SINCGARS RADIOS AND COMPONENTS 0 1 SINCGARS Receiver Transmitters RT RT 1523 Series 2 2 Technical 2 8 Manpack MP Radios 2 14 Battery Requirements 2 17 Vehicular Veh Radios 2 19 Single Radio Mount SRM Radio 2 32 Remote Control Unit 2 35 Control Monitor C M 2 37 Loudspeaker LS 671 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 3 1 Automated Net Control Device ANCD 2 10 3 2
128. TA B Ja SR CONNECTOR J3 TS Spa O FOR RT IN DATA A J5 POSITION A OR J4 FOR RT IN POSITION B CG 3855 VRC J1 POWER AMPLIFIER P AUD DATA LOUDSPEAKER Die CONNECTED J2 POWER gt MOUNTING BASE AMPLIFIER 2m m CONNECTOR J3 FOR RT IN POSITION A OR J4 FOR RT IN POSITION B 2 Receiver Transmitters RT RT 1523 A B C D E Mounting Base MB MT 6352 A part of installation kit Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 A B C D E Vehicular Antenna AS 3900 3916 part of installation kit 2 Handsets HS H 250 part of installation kit 2 Loudspeakers LS LS 671 part of installation kit Power Amplifier PA AM 7238 A B Cable W2 connects RT ANT to PA 2 Cables W4 connect RTs to VAA 2 Antenna Cables CG 3856 part of installation kit 2 Loudspeaker Cables CX 13292 part of installation kit Power Cable part of installation kit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 yas Figure 2 16 Short Range Long Range SR LR Radio Components 2 23 11 5820 890 10 8 2 51 Short Range Long Range Radio with Dismount Components AN VRC 91A D F Same as Short Range Long Range Radio plus Dismount Manpack Radio 2 5g Long Range Long Range Radio Components AN VRC 92A D F COLOR CODED COLOR CODED CABLE AND CABLE AND CONNECTOR CONNECTOR SECOND POWER SECOND POWER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY USED ASSEMBLY USED ONLY FOR LR LR ONL
129. TAR needs to do two things after sending the new TEK to net members First while the new TEK is automatically loaded into receiving station radios it must be loaded from the ANCD into the NCS RT following the AK OTAR Also while the KEK in receiving radios is automatically updated it must be updated by the sending NCS The NCS should always have his primary net s KEK in his RT 4 25 71 5820 890 10 8 Although sending OTAR demands several actions on the part of the sending NCS net operators need do nothing except stay off the PIT to receive the new TEK Special features of the AK OTAR procedure are that the TEK in the operational channel of receiving stations is replaced electronically by the new TEK when the AK OTAR is sent Also the KEK in all receiving stations is automatically updated changed at the time the AK OTAR is sent 4 8b Sending FH Data by Electronic Remote Fill Process ERF UPDATE FH DATA UPDATE SENDING ERF UPDATE 4 26 Where the Cold Start ERF was sent on the MAN channel an update ERF is sent over the operational channel To replace the FH data being used in the operational channel the sending NCS alerts net operations to standby tells them in which channel to store the ERF and sends it The new FH data can be loaded in the operational channel only or through sequential actions into all channels The procedure for sending an update i
130. TENANCE 81 General BY DESIGN Your SINCGARS radio was designed to be highly reliable and as free as possible of maintenance requirements especially for the operator Your SINCGARS radio requires no periodic maintenance services Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services are required of the operator before during and after operations DEFINITION Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS means systematic caring inspecting and servicing of equipment to keep it in good condition and prevent breakdowns 8 1 11 5820 890 10 8 STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS The purpose of PMCS is to ensure that your SINCGARS radios and associated items of equipment meet Army maintenance standards which are summarized here as Equipment is fully mission capable or Corrective actions are being or have been taken and Required repairs are being made or have been requested of the proper maintenance level and Required supplies and repair parts are on hand or have been requisitioned As a SINCGARS radio operator you are expected to do the following Perform prescribed PMCS Before Operations steps each time you place the radio into operation Periodically perform PMCS During Operations steps while the radio is being operated Perform prescribed PMCS After Operations steps once your use of the radio has been completed If authorized and able to do so correct all faults deficiencies or proble
131. Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter SEND Scroll 1 4 amp press ENTR to select Set 1 7 14 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS c Select SOI data to send 1 ACTIONS Scroll to Identify set Press ENTR to select set RESULTS Enter YES or NO Enter YES or NO Enter YES or NO Enter YES or NO Enter STU d Send SOI information by STU transfer 2 Ensure receiving station is ready for you to send Press SEND Set name number Edn name time period Do you want to transfer QREF Y N Do you want to specify groups to send Y N Do you want to specify a time pd to send Y N include Suffix amp Smoke Pyro data Y N send to Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu Connect to STU and press SEND WAIT Both STUs must be placed in secure data mode Processing Please watt shows of bytes sent Sending of SOI data Is completed time Set is selected only as an example Either full or selected data can be sent by STU transfer but they must be sent one at a Any SO item may be selected for STU transfer Do not press SEND until you ensure the receiving station is ready to receive 11 5820 890 10 8 7 31 Receive SOI Information Into An ANCD STU STU Task 4 DESCRIPTION This task allows an NCS or communications specialist to receiv
132. U DIFFERENCES Major differences between the SINCGARS RT and RCU are these RCU does not accept FH data uses that data loaded into the companion RT RCU has speaker connection and switch in lieu of RT RXMT and ANT connectors RCU FCTN switch has an intercom ICM position in lieu of the RT remote REM position RCU SIG display lights when companion RT receives a signal RCU BATT key on first press provides RCU battery life Indication on second press provides RT battery life indication If two wire connecting RCU with RT is cut or disconnected or RT FCTN is not set to REM RCU display shows OPEN 11 5820 890 10 8 When PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR SINCGARS REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RCU Control Receiver Transmitter C 11561 C U ltem to Check Service CONTROLS SPKR RF PWR CHAN MODE DIM COMSEC VOL Operator Procedure Check for cracked or broken controls Check for loose controls Check for frozen controls Check for missing control knobs Not Fully Mission Capable If Broken control does not function Loose control does not function Frozen control does not function Knob missing and control does not function Before Before CABLES Audio Data W4 Field Wire WD1 POWER Manpack Vehicular RCU SELF TEST Connect RCU to RT and set RT FCTN to REM Check for mi
133. UENCY AS RC LOUDSPEAKER W2 9916 7 CONTROL UNIT 10 ANTENNA ANTENNA 5 LS 671 VRC VEHICULAR VEHICULAR AS 3900 VRC 9 4 2 CABLE ASSEMBLY RECEIVER TRANSMITTER CONTROL SPECIAL PURPOSE RADIO RT MONITOR ELECTRICAL W4 RT 1523E C U C 11291 VRC 11 13 12 2 20 Figure 2 13 SINCGARS Radio Components 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5 Short Range SR Radio Components AN VRC 87A D F DATA J5 A Hae LOUDSPEAKER else 2 CONNECTED MOUNTING CONNECTOR 43 AUD DATA RT 1523E DATA A J5 LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO MOUNTING BASE CONNECTOR J3 AUD DATA Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523 A B C D E Mounting Base MB MT 6352 A part of installation kit Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 A B C D E Vehicular Antenna AS 3900 3916 part of installation kit Handset HS H 250 part of installation kit Loudspeaker LS LS 671 part of installation kit Cable W4 connects RT to VAA Antenna Cable CG 3856 part of installation kit Loudspeaker Cable CX 13292 part of installation kit Power Cable part of installation kit amp gt Figure 2 14 Short Range SR Radio Components 2 21 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5 ge Radio with Dismount SR D Com Same as Short Ran
134. UX Performance Data 3 6 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU a STU Capabilities 3 8 b STU Characteristics 13 8 STU Physical Data 3 9 See manufacturer s user manual for detailed operating instructions 3 5 VEHICULAR INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SET VIC AN WC 1 3 10 a Capabilities euius b Characteristics Liuius 3 10 Physical Data 11 11 5830 340 12 for detailed operating instructions HANDHELD REMOTE CONTROL RADIO DEVICE HRCRD 3 12 a HRCRD 3 13 Global Positioning System 11 5820 890 10 8 3 1 AUTOMATED CONTROL DEVICE ANCD AN CYZ 10 31 ANCD Capabilities 5 PRIMARY USE REPLACEMEN DATA LOADS CAPACITIES FRONT VIEW gt REAR VIEW gt cover open Capable of receiving storing and transferring data from ANCD to ANCD from ANCD to SINCGARS radios and from ANCD to other compatible communications electronic equipment The ANCD is used primarily for handling of COMSEC keys FH data sync time and signal operating instructions SOI information For SINCGARS applications the ANCD replaces COMSEC devices such as KYK 13 KYX 15 and KOI 18 as well as electronic counter counter measure ECCM fill MX 18290 A typical ANCD data load at the operator level consists of two loadsets COMSEC
135. Y FOR LR LR CJ DGABNGS USED ONLY FOR 4 DASHED CABLES USED LR LR ONLY FOR LR LR ZOLOR CODED 4 COLOR CODED CABLE AND CABLE AND CONNECTOR e CONNECTOR RT 1523E 2 Receiver Transmitters RT RT 1523 A B C D E Mounting Base MB MT 6352 A part of installation kit Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 A B C D E Vehicular Antenna AS 3900 3916 part of installation kit 2 Handsets HS 250 part of installation kit 2 Loudspeakers LS LS 671 part of installation kit 2 Power Amplifiers PA AM 7238 A B Power Amplifier Mount PA Mt MT 6353 Cable W2 connects RT ANT to PA 2 Cables W4 connect RTs to VAA 3 Cable CG 3856 1 connects PA to antenna 5 2 are in installation kit Cable CX 13291 connects RT B PA Mt to VAA Cable CX 13298 connects RT A to RT B for RXMT Cable CX 13303 connects RT B PA Mt to MB 2 Loudspeaker Cables CX 13292 part of installation kit Figure 2 17 Long Range Long Range LR LR Radio Components 2 24 11 5820 890 10 8 2 50 Connectors models RT B SYSTEM CONNECTOR 47 _ SYSTEM CONNECTOR J8 SYSTEM AUD DATA CONNECTOR P1 CONNECTOR J2 AUD DATA A CONNECTOR J3 DATAB CONNECTOR 44 CONNECTOR 5 SPKR CONNECTOR J6 CONNECTOR 1 THUMBSCREW AND BOTTOM CLAMP SHELF REMOTE LOCAL INJECT EJECT LEVER SHORTING BAR DIMMABLE ON OFF SWITCH LIGH
136. YPAD BUTTON BATT Battery on same key as CALL CALL on same key as BATT 5 3b Technical Receiver Transmitter Enhanced Data New Data Modes RCU Function GPS Time Loading Internal FSK Detector TM 11 5820 890 10 8 PURPOSE Used to check and set battery life condition in the manpack radio When this key is pressed the RT display shows battery life indication This key is used to communicate between the radio and an attached RCU With FCTN set to REM and RT connected to the RCU pressing CALL and PTT at the same time causes the display to show CALL and an alarm is heard in the RT and RCU handsets SIP ASIP The SIP ASIP RT offers enhanced data rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS where the N indicates new or enhanced rates The advantages of these enhanced data rates are better accuracy great speed longer range and improved forward error correction Two new data modes are also provided Packet PCKT which supports operations involving FBCB2 hardware and software and RS 232 by which data messages can be sent from SIP ASIP RT to SIP ASIP RT using computers and commercial Xmodem communications software a widely used file transfer protocol The SIP ASIP RT can be used as a remote control unit by merely selecting the option under the key of the SIP ASIP RT keypad The RCU C 1 11561 can still be used to remotely control a SIP A
137. a net or station which is not a part of the operational loadset or loadsets if more than one radio is being used Commanders staff officers drivers and others who frequently move about the battlefield should be able to perform this task without assistance other than reference to the Operator s Pocket Guide As noted below the RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio requires use of the FH M position in order to change a net ID and will allow the operator to change only the last two digits of the net ID Despite these differences the procedure for changing a net ID is essentially the same Use of this procedure enable the operator to contact virtually any SINCGARS station within a division SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare radio for net ID change b Enter new net ID in RT 1 2 3 Set MODE to FH M Do not transmit while in the RT 1523 only FH M position Set CHAN to 1 6 To channel where net ID to be aes in now stored 1 Press FREQ Display shows F XXX 2 Press CLR Display shows 3 Enter new net ID Display shows XXX 3 digits 4 Press STO Display blinks new net ID is now stored 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS 00 RESULTS c Resume normal Return MODE to FH communications set to FH M 2 Set FCTN to SQ ON 3 Set CHAN to 1 6 as New net ID is now ready for use desired The RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio requires the MODE switc
138. ach channel the radio allows for time differences greater than 4 seconds among nets Once your radio is operational in the FH mode sync time can be changed in all seven clocks by the three methods discussed above Sync time can be changed in a single channel leaving other channels unchanged only by receipt of an ERF and storing it in the channel to be changed Nothing will take your radio OUT of a FH net quicker than changing sync time unintentionally Normally a SINCGARS operator loads sync time in preparation for net opening and does not touch the TIME button thereafter 11 5820 890 10 8 NCS CONTROL OTHER NETS COMMON SYNC TIME DIFFERENCES RT VERSION NORMAL COMM PASSIVE LATE NET ENTRY CUE AND ERF The NCS radio and only the NCS radio uses the MODE position In this mode the NCS radio automatically brings the time of all net radios back into synchronization every time the NCS transmits In short when an operator is monitoring the operational net there is little or no possibility that your radio will drift out of proper sync time Remember that the SINCGARS radio can transmit or receive on only one channel at a time In order to keep your radio in sync with nets other than your operational net you need to check into or monitor each of the other nets at least once every 24 hours With the fielding of the Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR all units have been provided a ready s
139. adio Other crewmembers can Listen only on intercom and Talk and listen on radio INT ONLY Crew can Intercom Only Talk and listen on Intercom but Cannot talk or listen on radios VOLUME The volume control adjusts the audio level for headsets connected to that crewbox SIG EXT OFF This control is used only in the SIG position Other settings have no function with the SINCGARS radio 11 5820 890 10 8 5 4 PRIMARY OPERATOR PREPARATION TASKS 5 4a Definition of Primary Operator Preparation Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED There are five tasks categorized as primary for the SINCGARS radio operator manpack or vehicular and one preparation task for the ASIP radio These tasks enable the operator to meet all normal communications requirements when the unit is in an operational situation These five primary tasks involve loading the radio with required single channel frequencies COMSEC keys FH data and sync time Additionally they include the use of passive late net entry and the ANCD as the primary source of SOI information All SINCGARS radio operators are expected to be able to perform these five primary tasks without assistance other than reference to TM11 5820 890 10 6 Operator s Pocket Guide Operator Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS sed Chapter 8 are to be performed prior to performing these tasks 5 4b Summary of Primary Op
140. ame for the soldier carried DISMOUNT AN PRC 119A D F The A D F indicates this is an ICOM radio Do not confuse this designation with the A found in RT version and other component numbers Dismount 1 the term used to indicate that the equivalent of a manpack radio is included within the components of selected vehicular radios Once assembled there is no difference between a radio referred to as manpack and one called dismount 2 3b Radio Components ET 4 Antenna manpack radio AS 3683 PRC AS 4266 PRC long antenna Receiver Transmitter RT may be RT 1523 Series Handset H 250 U or Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD C 12493 U Battery Box may be CY 8523A B CY 8523C is used with the HRCRD Not required for ASIP RT Battery main power may be Battery Non Rechargeable BA 5590 U Battery Rechargeable BB 590 U or Battery Rechargeable BB 390 U Carrying Case Figure 2 11 Manpack Radio Components 11 5820 890 10 8 2 3 Manpack Radio Physical Data NOTE Weights are in kilograms measurements are in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches All weights are approximate all measurements are maximums Table 2 3 Manpack Radio Physical Data Battery Box CY 8523A 8523B or 8523C LL NNNM Antenna long 4266
141. an enemy with direction finding capability can pin point your location It may be necessary for you to move frequently or limit transmission times to avoid enemy action In that the SC mode uses only one frequency at a time to send or receive messages the enemy may be able to jam your communications fairly easily To employ the Cold Start net opening procedure it is necessary to use the MAN channel for sending and receiving the electronic remote fill ERF which contains FH data and sync time for frequency hopping operations When an operator needs to enter an FH net and does not have the required FH data or a radio with FH capability it is necessary to cue press PTT on CUE channel or frequency with COMSEC set to PT For detailed procedure below Calling operator sets CHAN to CUE MODE to SC COMSEC to PT RF PWR to HI presses PTT Calling operator changes from PT to CT immediately after pressing PTT This procedure is repeated about every 15 seconds until answer is received Receiving NCS sees CUE in RT display NCS changes to CUE responds in CT NCS directs caller to change to MAN On MAN chan in CT mode NCS determines what calling operator needs Figure 4 3 HOW TO CUE AN NCS 11 5820 890 10 8 4 3 FREQUENCY HOPPING FH COMMUNICATIONS 4 3a Capabilities FREQUENCIES HOPPING COMMUNICATING In the frequency hopping FH mode of operation the SINCGARS radio transm
142. and Part Number RADIO SET AN VRC 90A LONG RANGE RADIO SET AN VRC 90D LONG RANGE RADIO SET AN VRC 90F LONG RANGE Cable Assembly Radio Frequency W2 80063 A3013824 21 3 RT to PA Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 80063 A3103735 7 or 80063 A3255571 RT to VAA Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 5 RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 or RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 RT 1523E C U 80063 A3267334 RADIO SET AN VRC 91A LONG SHORT RADIO SET AN VRC 91D RANGE DISMOUNT RADIO SET AN VRC 91F Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA AM 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 AM 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 AM 7239C VRC 80063 A3245066 1 or AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3267335 Amplifier Radio Frequency PA 7238 80063 A3013357 1 AM 7238A VRC 80063 A3132135 1 7238 80063 210919 1 Cable Assembly Radio Frequency W2 80063 A3013824 21 3 RT to PA Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 80063 A3103735 7 or 80063 A3255571 RT to VAA Antenna Manpack AS 3683 PRC 80063 A3132025 1 Battery Box CY 8523A PRC 80063 A3018381 1 CY 8523B PRC 80063 A3132600 1 CY 8523C PRC 80063 A3249648 1 Denotes Dismount Components 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF END ITE
143. and the enemy Advise NCS of your problem 5 69 11 5820 890 10 8 FH OPERATIONS Jamming anti jamming procedures for FH operations are shown in the chart below JAMMING ANTI JAMMING PROCEDURES FH MODE OF OPERATIONS SYMPTOM You hear loud noise or strong static making net traffic difficult to impossible to hear Your SIG display remains on or goes on and off at regular intervals Signal strength is greater than LO You hear a constant hiss or background noise in the handset but no loud noise or net traffic You hear background popping or static when receiving and your operating range is reduced Your SIG display is flickering 5 70 POSSIBILITIES You are being jammed if disconnecting the antenna causes the SIG display to drop to LO and noise level is reduced You may be experiencing interference from a friendly communication system called a co site problem There is a captured RT in your net constantly transmitting to act as a jammer There is a stuck mike or bad handset in you net that is locked in the PTT position Your own handset is stuck if you hear sidetone without pressing PTT SIG display drops to LO or below when handset is disconnected You are probably experiencing co site interference from a friendly radio ACTIONS If feasible try to place an obstacle between you and the enemy Advise NCS of your problem Try to get interfering system shut down momentarily
144. andom sequence the radio begins to hop In shot t the term FH Data refers to Hopsets with Lockouts integrated TSK and Net ID Typically division sized units use the same Hopset and TSK for all their SINCGARS frequency hopping nets On the other hand each net is assigned its own Net ID 4 3 Sync Time OTHER VARIABLE RADIO CLOCKS LOADING TIME CHANNEL TIME CHANGING TIME DANGER TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The remaining variable required for two or more frequency hopping radios to communicate is called Sync Time In addition to the FH Data elements discussed above communicating radios must also have the same sync time within plus or minus 4 seconds In order to maintain proper sync time the SINCGARS radio uses seven internal clocks a base clock plus one for each of the six FH channels MAN and CUE settings will display the base clock time For purposes of net opening sync time can be loaded into the radio three ways electronically from an ANCD RT 1523A B C D E only manually through the RT keypad or by receipt of a cold start net opening ERF All three procedures set all seven clocks to the same sync time The plus or minus 4 seconds sync time requirement applies to each net individually For example if you are operating on Channel 1 and have proper sync time for that net you cannot communicate on Channel 2 unless you also have the proper sync time for that net With a separate clock for e
145. appears in the display RT FCTN switch must be in REM for HRCRD to be functional To turn the backlight on press the light button To turn the light off press the light button a second time To change the level of audio volume rotate the volume control knob on the side of the HRCRD to reach to level desired For control of the other radio functions make all the required selections and changes using the R keypad and front panel controls Press the Push To Talk PTT switch on the side of the HRCRD Place handset near one end and adjust volume to required level for reception 11 5820 890 10 8 Controls Figure 3 8 HRCRD Cables Figure 3 9 HRCRD Front and Rear Views 11 5820 890 10 8 4 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION IN THIS CHAPTER SECURE CIPHER TEXT CT COMMUNICATIONS 4 2 a Integrated COMSEC 4 2 b Traffic Encryption Key _ Cipher Text Operations SINGLE CHANNEL SC COMMUNICATIONS 4 4 b Limitations I 4 5 c Required Usage 4 5 FREQUENCY HOPPING FH COMMUNICATIONS a Capabilities 4 6 b Frequency Hopping Data rrr 4 6 de msan ee ee 4
146. ated FH data Obtain from SigO ANCD or update ERF and effective time SOI as appropriate 2 Load new FH data into Perform ICOM fill or change NCS radio Eset in one channel b Prepare net operators for 1 Alert net that an update Wait until the net is clear of net update ERF ERF is to be sent operational traffic 2 Tell operators what Facilitates channel change channel to store ERF when data is effective 3 Advise operators when May be immediate or at a later new FH data is effective specified time c Send net update ERF 1 Set FCTN to LD If NCS RT is not in FH M set it there for sending ERF 2 Press LOAD on RT RT display show 3 Enter channel where ERF RT display shows HF XXX blinks data is stored and beeps 4 Press ERF on RT RT display shows SEND beeps keypad and shows HF XXX 6 Change FCTN from LD back to SQ ON 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS d Confirm receipt of ERF 1 Allow operators time to store net update ERF 2 Have operators ACK receipt of ERF 3 Have Alt NCS repeat ERF if required by operators e Make communications 1 At proper time change to check update ERF data 6 20 2 Check communications using update ERF data Have Alt NCS follow up for non responsive operators ERF is transmitted over the operational channel RESULTS 20 30 seconds should be adequate N A Allows NCS to control net and continue net operations N
147. ble when Hot Start procedures are used 4 5e Cold Start Procedure FORMER PRIMARY NCS RESPONSIBILITIES LOADING THE RT SENDING THE ERF RECEIVING THE ERF ICOM FILL MINUS SELECTIVE USE TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Prior to the fielding of ANCDs and PLGRs the Cold Start procedure was the primary method of net opening The NCS is responsible for announcing the date time of net opening ensuring net members have all required COMSEC key and FH data and for sending the net opening ERF Net operators are required to load COMSEC key and FH data into their radios in preparation for the Cold Start ERF Each receiving radio must have a TSK loaded in order to receive other required FH data by ERF At the prescribed time the NCS calls the net and announces that the net opening ERF will now be sent To do so the NCS merely retrieves appropriate data from the channel where it was stored and presses ERF on the RT keypad Seb Figure 4 9 below or NCS Primary Task 4 for detailed procedures Receiving operators standby at the announced time with FCTN set to LD and MAN channel selected When the is received operators will note the signal display jump and the RT display will show HF The operator then presses STO followed by the channel number in which the ERF data is to be stored If operators use ICOM fill procedures for their Cold Start net opening preparations but omit sync time their radios will be fully operatio
148. c time and manpack battery life indicator are deleted after 5 seconds radio is completely inoperative position is used when radio is not is use and for storage Z FH Clears all FH data after 5 seconds operator pauses in this postion for 5 Zero FHdata seconds when setting switch to OFF STBY Makes radio Inoperative but all stored data is retained sync time is lost after 24 Stand By hours setting to SQ ON returns radio to fully operational status In STBY power IS drawn from main source RT 1523B C D E standby time has been Increased to 200 hours TST This position causes RT to perform self test of RT data and ECCM circuits Test test results are shown in RT display Running RT self test IS a routine step in start up procedure LD The load position is required for loading SC frequencies FH data and Load COMSEC keys required also to receive an ERF SQ ON This is the normal operating position of the radio for FH mode For SC mode Squelch On this position reduces noise SQ OFF This position IS not used for the FH mode In the SC mode SQ OFF helps to Squelch Off bring in distant stations to work through jamming and to be compatible with radios lacking squelch capability REM The REM position disables front panel controls and is required for use of the Remote Control Monitor and Remote Control Unit RCU RXMT Use of the RXMT position enables the RT to automatically retransmit traffic from
149. can carry in your pocket Use your pocket guide as a handy reference that prevents you from having to memorize task performance procedures 11 5820 890 10 8 1 INTRODUCTION IN THIS CHAPTER PURPOSE GENERAL INFORMATION Maintenance Forms Records and Reports Consolidated index of Army Publications and Blank Forms Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations EIR Reporting Errors and Recommending Improvements Hand Receipt HR Manuals Security Classification and Marking 1 1 PURPOSE READY REFERENCE Provide you with a ready reference when you need information regarding SINCGARS Single Channel Ground amp Airborne Radios radios their components and associated equipment which is frequently employed in conjunction with SINCGARS radios For example this Manual contains official nomenclatures common names National Stock Numbers part numbers and unit authorizations EASE OF USE Offer essential guidance regarding the employment and operation of SINCGARS that is easy to locate and readily understandable BACK UP Augment the operator and net control station NCS pocket guides with additional guidance and information as appropriate 1 2 SCOPE EQUIPMENT This SINCGARS Operator s Manual cover capabilities and general specifications of SINCGARS Ground ICOM Radios using receiver transmitter RT versions 1523 RT 1523A RT 15238 RT 1523C RT 1523D and RT 1523E It covers both Manpack
150. capability of the SIP ASIP RT to communicate with SIP ASIP VAA regarding data loads and requirements This feature is currently not used GPS 5 SA 6 CID 8 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The GPS key is not used it represents a possible future capability of the SINCGARS SIP ASIP radio The SA key is not used it represents a possible future capability of the SINCGARS SIP ASIP radio The CID key is not used it represents a possible future capability of the SINCGARS SIP ASIP radio MENU 0 CLR STO CLR MENU FREQ BACKLIGHT 2 2c SIP ASIP VAA Memory Internet Figure 2 8 SIP ASIP Keypad MENU appears on SINCGARS ASIP when key is pressed Multiple presses will scroll MENU ASIP radio must be in SQ ON press key FREQ then CHG to change intensity The SIP ASIP VAA contains a small microprocessor which allows data in the form of routing tables to be stored in the SIP ASIP VAA When used in conjunction with FBCB2 hardware and software the SIP ASIP VAA supports internet communications among SINCGARS FH nets and between SINCGARS and EPLRS nets Employment of the internet feature requires that the SIP ASIP RT be set to the Packet data mode 11 5820 890 10 8 2 24 Connectors SIP 1 System The P1 systems connector is located on the back of the SIP RT This connector provides RT power and signaling int
151. changes in task organization can be anticipated revised loadsets are developed by the supporting LCU operator When time does not permit LCU operator support using units change net IDs as appropriate to accommodate changes in task organization An ICOM fill is the loading of a loadset plus sync time from an ANCD into a SINCGARS RT RT 1523A B C D E With RT 1523 sync time is loaded via the RT keypad As a result of an ICOM fill all six channels of the radio are loaded with COMSEC key FH data and sync time After an ICOM fill is performed the operator needs only to call the NCS to enter the net Performing an ICOM fill is one of the basic tasks required of all SINCGARS operators The procedure is simple and requires only the steps shown ir Figure 4 7 below Also see Primary Operator Task 2 Load COMSEC FH Data Sync Time into Radio Using ICOM Fill Turn radio and ANCD ON On ANCD select Radio Send Radio and ICOM from the ANCD menu Connect ANCD to the RT with proper fill cable Set RT FCTN to LD and COMSEC to CT Press LOAD button on RT All six RT channels are now loaded with COMSEC key FH data and sync time if loading RT 1523A B C D E Figure 4 7 HOW TO PERFORM AN ICOM FILL 11 5820 890 10 8 4 54 Hot Start Procedure NCS REQUIREMENTS LOADING THE RT NET ENTRY PREFERRED METHOD SPECIAL MEMBERS NCS requirements regarding the Hot Start net opening procedure are limited to setting t
152. conds but not more than one minute different from net sync time The Passive Late Net Entry process enables an operator to re enter the net without requiring action on the part of the NCS or other net operators PRIMARY TASK 5 Obtain 501 information from ANCD SOI information electronically stored in the ANCD replaces the paper SOI extract The ANCD SOI program is used when Information on nets suffixes pyro smoke sign countersign is needed It may be used to view quick reference QREF related items in group time period set find and memo It may also be used to obtain the net ID of a net that is not a part of the loadset being used 5 4c Select RT Preparation Settings from MENU Preparation TASK 1 DESCRIPTION This task is required to set the ASIP radio to proper settings for other tasks MENU selections are Volume Channel Power Mode and COMSEC These settings will need to change as operationally necessary The backlight function is also covered DETAILED FLOWCHART SELECT RT PREPARATION SETTINGS FROM MENU SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Set RT Volume 1 Press MENU Press MENU to display Vol level 2 Press Digit 1 9 for Vol Display reads WHSP if 0 selected Setting 0 for Whisper Mode b Set RT Channel Press MENU until CHAN Display reads 1 6 Q for CUE 2 Press Digit 1 6 for Channel M for Manual desired 0 for MAN 7 for CUE c Set RT Power Press MENU until PWR Display reads LO M HI PA Press CHG
153. coordination guidance now be sent after receipt for MK OTAR of OTAR return to chan 1 d Send TEK by MK Say Go to chan 6 now OTAR press RCV now Go to chan 6 and press Transfer Progress SEND now 1 Keys Transferred Return to chan 1 Prepares Source NCS radio for comm with Target NCSs Wait 30 set after sending Informs Target NCSs of TEK ID say OTAR completed and effective time advises ID 1 Source NCS which stations did effective at DTG ACK and did not receive OTAR In using the MK procedure there is considerable advantage if an Alternate NCS takes the primary role in sending the OTAR For example an Alternate NCS can load the new TEK into a second SINCGARS radio or into a TEK position other than that be used for the operational net This means that once the has been sent the Alternate NCS can monitor communications using both new and old TEKs thus making it easier to bring in any stations that missed receiving the initial not press SEND until Target NCSs ready to press RCV Then press SEND within 20 seconds of directing them to press RCV kkk If distance or obstacles between NCS stations requires it an RXMTstation may be used in transmitting an MK OTAR Transmitting and receiving stations must have the same KEK loaded in channel 6 The fact that the RXMT link requires use of two net IDs does not change the requirem
154. d NO Either or selected SOi information can be transferred using this procedure but not at the same time f you wish to transfer a QREF file you may use this procedure or refer to Special Operator Task 2 To develop a QREF file merely scroll to SOI items desired and press for KEEP to place each item in QREF Do not press SEND until you are ready to press RCV Then press RCV within 20 seconds of pressing SEND 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3h Conduct Hot Start Net Opening Primary NCS Task 3 DESCRIPTION This task represents a basic NCS requirement to open the SINCGARS secure frequency hopping net During use of the Hot Start net opening procedure NCS responsibilities are primarily supervisory in that each operator loads the radio with COMSEC keys FH data and sync time in preparation for the net opening Upon completing the ICOM fill which loads COMSEC FH data and sync time into all six RT channels the operator merely calls the NCS in secure FH mode and requests permission to enter the net NCS requirements are limited to ensuring that operators are provided the required data for net opening and respond to operator requests for net entry DETAILED FLOWCHART CONDUCT HOT START NET OPENING SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Prepare NCS radio for 1 Load CUE MAN andSC CUE MAN and SC Perform Primary Operator Task 1 Primary Operator Task 1 Hot Start net opening fregs as required Load COMSEC k
155. d at prescribed intervals and as the need arises Radio configurations consisting of one or two RTs mounting base vehicular amplifier adapter power amplifier power amplifier adapter power supply adapter antennas loudspeakers and handsets as appropriate these radios are installed in vehicles using specified installation kits Procedure by which stored data COMSEC FH data sync time and SC frequencies may be cleared from the RT 11 5820 890 10 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 11 5820 890 10 8 INDEX SUBJECT PAGE Aritelilid taba hos E E tet ID Antjamming actions 0 5 69 Associated equipment maintenance 0 Automated Net Control Device ANCD 0 02 Capabilities 3 2 Characteristics 3 3 Loads and updating 4 23 Main power battery requirements 8 27 Operator 00 02222 5 19 Operator maintenance 0 8 21 Physicaldata okie hist ieee 3 3 Battery life condition 5 64 Battery requirements 8 25 Battery requirements S P 2 17 Hold Up Battery ese Re e reri 2 18 i EE HE Main 2 2 42 2 02 0 22 2 2 17 Manpack radio Power source 2 17 2 18 Broadcast procedure for SOI information ss LLL LLL 4 27 Cabling Shaws 2 29 Change Eset one channel task
156. de display shows operating mode Used to select RT channel including CUE and MAN Channel display shows channel selected with 0 for MAN and for CUE Used to select COMSEC keys Used to select COMSEC mode plain text or cipher text COMSEC display shows PT or CT Used to change C M from standby S to main M INIT switch is used to make changes Control display shows operating condition Used with FCTN switch to change functions of RT and C M Moving INIT switch up moves FCTN display to right or increases channel number Moving INIT switch down moves FCTN display to left or decreases the channel number This control adjusts brightness of displays Turning it clockwise bnghtens displays counterclockwise dims displays DIM control is turned fully counterclockwise for use of night vision goggles 5 23 11 5820 890 10 8 15 39 Loudspeaker LS 671 CONTROLS CONTROL POWER SWITCH VOLUME CONTROL POWER INDICATOR LAMP 5 24 There are only two controls for the LS 671 plus a power indicator lamp The LS 671 allows the SINCGARS operator to perform two functions from the loudspeaker turn the radio on and off and adjust the volume level of the handset and speaker POWER INDICATOR LAMP HANDSET CONNECTOR J2 Figure 5 19 Loudspeaker LS 671 LOUDSPEAKER LS 671 CONTROLS AND USES PURPOSE This switch enables the SINCGARS radio operator to turn the radio on and off
157. ded a copy of TM 11 5820 890 10 6 SINCGARS Ground Operator s Pocket Guide By carrying this guide with them on the job and by following the procedures provided operators can be assured of required job task proficiency OPTIONS When overall operator proficiency is low due to personnel turnover or other factors units may elect to have communications specialists or designated NCOs perform selected tasks such as loading data and sync time into radios COMM EX Whether the objective is to build or maintain SINCGARS operator proficiency there is no better or easier tool to use than the unit communications exercise Opening nets frequently and having operators transmit and receive realistic traffic are important requirements Weekly short duration COMM EXs are one of the best ways to conduct SINCGARS sustainment training for both operators and NCS personnel Unit sustainment training is the key to SINCGARS proficiency 4 12f MSE Compatibility DESIGN SINCGARS and the Mobile Subscriber Equipment MSE System were designed to work together on the battlefield The two systems even share some frequencies without interference to either CO LOCATION Some vehicles such as command post vehicles have both SINCGARS and MSE radios installed The Mobile Subscriber Radio Telephone MSRT and a SINCGARS radio cannot be operated from the same vehicle at the same time unless one or both of the antennas are remoted 4 48 11 5820 890 10 8
158. des SINCGARS SDM and Enhanced EDM TM11 5820 890 10 8 4 11c Use of LS 671 SOURCE Loudspeaker LS 671 is a part of selected installation kits See SB 11 131 2 for a listing of individual kits PURPOSE The primary purpose of the LS 671 is to allow for remote transmitting and receiving of voice communications to the length of the LS 671 cable CX 13292 being used Cables are available in lengths varying from 3 to 100 feet FUNCTIONS At the 15 671 these functions can be performed sed Figure 4 28 below for controls available Radio can be turned ON and OFF by use of the power switch By connecting a handset to the LS 671 J2 the radio can be keyed and messages transmitted Net traffic can be monitored by proper adjustment of the loudspeaker volume control ON OFF im gt L INDICATOR LAMP SWITCH CB1 3 NM DS1 HANDSET CONNECTOR Figure 4 28 Loudspeaker LS 671 LIMITATIONS The remote capabilities of the LS 671 complement rather than replace those of the RCU Where the RCU supports remote operation up to 4 KM the LS 671 is limited to 100 feet at most Also the LS 671 provides for only the most basic radio control functions ADVANTAGES The LS 671 is extremely useful for command posts and fire control centers where operations personnel are performing other than radio operator functions The limited remote capability of the LS 671 enables such personnel to operate the radio from their work station
159. dios lacking squelch capability The REM position disables front panel controls and is required for use of the Control Monitor Remote Control Unit RCU and HRCRD Use of the RXMT position enables the RT to automatically retransmit traffic from one radio through another Both RTs are set to RXMT position and connected by an RXMT cable 5 17 11 5820 890 10 8 SIP ASIP VAA Memory The SIP ASIP VAA contains a small microprocessor which allows data in the form of routing tables to be stored Internet When used in conjunction with FBCB2 hardware and software the SIP ASIP VAA supports internet communications among SINCGARS FH nets and between SINCGARS and EPLRS nets Employment of the internet feature requires that the SIP ASIP RT be set to the Packet data mode 5 3c Remote Control Unit Controls FRONT PANEL The front panel of the RCU is quite similar to that of the RT There is one additional control an ON OFF speaker switch The only other difference is that the REM position of the RT FCTN switch becomes ICM intercom used for talking with the radio operator over the connecting field wire RCU operator may call RT operator by setting FCTN to ICM and pressing CALL and PTT at the same time PWR RCV SIG COMSEC AUD FILL RF POWER gay RECEIVE SIGNAL KEYBOARD ue AUDIO FILL SPEAKER CHANNEL DISPLAY COVER 52 FOTN KEYBOA
160. e and store in an ANCD that SOI information classified or unclassified sent from another station by STU DETAILED FLOWCHART RECEIVE SOI INFORMATION INTO ANCD VIA STU SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Coordinate SOI transfer O Recre mai citon initial call from by STU sending station Coordinate STU transfer Proper STU keys 2400 BPS preparations PT CT voice checked b Prepare ANCD for STU 1 Turn ANCD ON select transfer Soi Radio supervisor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter RECEIVE receive from Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 5 Enter STU Connect to STU and press SEND WAIT c Receive SOI data sent Ensure you are ready for by STU transfer sender to SEND 2 Place your STU in secure data mode 3 Press RCV when Processing Please wait sender presses SEND shows of of bytes sent Sending of SOI data Is completed Set is selected only as an example Any SOI item may be selected for transfer by STU Do not press RCV until sending station is ready to press SEND 11 5820 890 10 8 7 4 FREQUENCY HOPPING MULTIPLEXER FHMUX TASKS DESCRIPTION This task allows an NCS to establish radio priority strategy for up to four radios when FHMUX is employed DETAILED FLOWCHART NCS OPERATIONS WITH MULTIPLEXER SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a SET POWER ON Set POWER toggle The POWER indicator should
161. e input impedance is 150 ohms AUDIO Audio input minimum is 1 4 millivolts normal and 0 4 millivolts for whisper WHSP SQUELCH Squelch tone signal of 150 Hertz Hz is a part of all transmissions except when FCTN is set to SQ OFF 2 1 Receiver Characteristics SENSITIVITY Radio frequency RF signal sensitivity is 0 35 microvolt CHANNEL SPACING 25 KHz AUDIO Audio output impedance is 600 ohms with handset at AUD DATA or AUD FILL SQUELCH Receiver responds to 150 Hz tone with FCTN switch set to squelch on SQ ON or load LD when operating in SC mode POWER DRAIN Manpack receiver power draw is 225 milliamperes Vehicular receivers draw 0 762 amp for short range radio 1 094 amp for short range long range radio 0 942 amp for long range radio and 1 524 amp for long range long range radio 2 14 RT Model Differences Distinguishing Features Control knobs are affixed with side positioned Allen screws RT cover is affixed with slot headed screws Last two digits of net ID may be changed by operator RT Mode switch is set to FH M position to change net ID Sync time is loaded into RT manually via the keypad or by electronic remote fill ERF Running self test with COMSEC in PT results in display message of FAIL 5 Changing to CT clears message RT will accept ERF if sync time is less than one hour different from net sync time Figure 2 2 RT 1523 Features 11 5820 890 10 8 RT 1523A
162. e or Noise That Will Not Clear STEPS CHECKS 0 2 1 Set to STBY then FCTN to STBY then message noise clear YES Probemissoved Problem 1 solved back to SQ ON NO Go to Step 2 Set to Z FH Does display show GOOD YES Go to Step 3 NO See Unit Maintenance 3 Set FCTN to OFF wait 10 Does display now show YES Go to Step 4 set then back to Z FH GOOD NO See Unit Maintenance 4 Run RT Self Test Does self test result in display YES Go to Step 5 showing GOOD NO See Unit Maintenance 5 Perform ICOM Fill and Has message noise cleared YES Problem is solved Re enter Net NO See Unit Maintenance Do not perform Steps 2 thru 5 unless the nature of your mission will permit you to be out of the net for a short period Steps 2 thru 5 are the equivalent of re booting your radio In thathe SINCGARS radio is basically a computer this procedure frequent y works when other efforts to clear a strange message or noise do not 0 2 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SCOPE This paragraph of your SINCGARS Operator Manual briefly addresses the maintenance requirements of those items of equipment most often used in conjunction with your radio The intent of this paragraph is to give you a summary of operator maintenance tasks and provide appropriate references from which more detailed information may be obtained 8 2a PMCS for Control Receiver Transmitter RC
163. e or digital data communication Provides data rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 and 16 000 bits per second BPS also provides enhanced data rates 1200N 2400N 4800N 9600N PCKT RT 1523C D E only analog data interface AD1 and TACFIRE TF FREQUENCIES 2320 SC frequencies COMSEC Provides cipher text CT communications with integrated COMSEC ICOM feature RF PWR SWITCH ANT CONNECTOR J1 FCTN SWITCH DIM CONTROL KEYBOARD 11 5820 890 10 8 MODE a DISPLAY SYSTEMS CONNECTOR P1 GPS A Seg CONNECTOR AUD FILL CONNECTOR 03 COMSEC SWITCH VOL WHSP CONTROL AUD DATA CONNECTOR J4 Figure 2 1 RECEIVER TRANSMITTER RT RT 1523 Series 215 Transmitter Characteristics TYPICAL DUTY CYCLE MANPACK BATTERY POWER DRAIN CARRIER DEVIATION Typical duty cycle is defined as nine minutes of receiving or monitoring for each one minute of transmission time expressed as 9 1 duty cycle With a 9 1 duty cycle at 70 degrees F a new manpack main power battery BA 5590 has a service life of approximately 10 30 hours depending upon RT version and level of usage Se Chapter 9 for additional data regarding service life expectancy of manpack batteries Manpack transmission maximum power draw is 3 25 amperes vehicular radio is 6 25 amperes Carrier deviation voice is 6 5 Kilohertz KHz with audio input of 1 4 to 140 millivolts 11 5820 890 10 8 MICROPHONE Microphon
164. eadily contact other nets in the loadset 11 5820 890 10 8 NETIDES 1 ID 275 CO TEAM COMMAND CHANNEL 2 NET ID 678 FIRE SUPPORT NET CHANNEL 3 NET ID 280 RIGHT FLANK CO TEAM CHANNEL 4 NET ID 250 BN TF COMMAND NET CHANNEL 5 NET ID 733 ATCHD ENGINEER PLT CHANNEL 6 NET ID 255 BN TF ADMIN LOG NET OR Figure 4 5 EXAMPLE OF COMPANY LOADSET mem ree CHANNEL 5 NET ID 678 FIRE SUPPORT NET CHANNEL 6 NET ID 733 ATCHD ENGR PLT OR Figure 4 6 EXAMPLE OF PLATOON LOADSET If a KEK is loaded in Channel 6 in preparation for use of OTAR procedures Channel 6 may not then be used for either voice or data communications Sending a TEK by OTAR procedures is normally an infrequent requirement and Channel 6 requires FH data be loaded in order to send an OTAR message One solution is to load a TEK in Channel 6 use it for normal communications until requirement comes up and then load KEK from the ANCD into Channel 6 RESPONSIBILITIES TF CHANGES 4 5c ICOM Fill of RT DEFINITION PROCEDURE TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Unit Signal Officers NCOs are responsible for determining unit specific loadset requirements and advising the brigade or Separate battalion level Lightweight Computer Unit LCU operator of those requirements The LCU operator using the computer assembles data into loadsets and distributes them to the using units When
165. ear In that the two digit Julian year ends on 65 or 66 for leap year every 1 January the Julian Date must be changed to 01 This can be done by 1 NCS sending an 2 Operators reloading time directly from an ANCD or PLGR or 3 Operators manually changing the date in the radio by using the RT keypad Dates displayed in the ANCD and PLGR take the form of Day Month Year 23 09 95 When these dates are loaded into a SINCGARS radio they are automatically converted to the correct two digit Julian Date needed by the radio Appendix Alto this manual provides two digit Julian Date calendars for both regular and leap years If your net were the only one operating in the FH mode your NCS could select any two digit date for net opening Technically the radio will work on any two digit date The importance of using the prescribed two digit Julian Date is when there are other FH nets operating and you may need to contact them or they may need to contact you Unless both nets have the same two digit date as a part of sync time they cannot communicate 4 46 Precise GPS Time IMPORTANCE SOURCE COMMON BASE NO EXCEPTIONS 4 4c Common Zulu Time IMPORTANCE AVAILABILITY APPENDIX 11 5820 890 10 8 As with the two digit Julian Date the importance of having the same accurate sync time in all FH radios is for cross net communications If only one net is involved any time will do If you want to comm
166. ecial Operator Task 1 d Transfer QREF SOI Information from ANCD to ANCD Special Operator Task 2 e Transfer Full SOI Information from ANCD to ANCD Special Operator Task 2 5 49 f Perform Cold Start Net Opening Special Operator Task 3 5 51 g Receive Net Update from NCS Special Operator Task 4 5 52 h Perform CUE and Late Net Entry Special Operator Task 5 5 55 Conduct Retransmission Operations Special Operator Task 6 5 56 j Send as Part of RXMT Operation Special Operator Task 7 5 58 k Change Net ID Special Operator Task 8 5 60 5 6 SPECIAL OPERATOR TASKS SIP ASIP a Use SIP ASIP RT as Special Operator Task 9 5 62 b Send Data Via RS 232 Mode Special Operator Task 10 5 63 5 1 11 5820 890 10 8 OTHER OPERATOR PROCEDURES Battery Life Condition Indicator Loading and clearing Offset Frequencies Scrolling COMSEC Keys Scanning Capability Jamming and Anti Jamming Actions e200 154 GENERAL 1 BY DESIGN The SINCGARS radio was designed for ease of operation by the non technical general purpose user operator Once the radio has been put into operation and the operator has entered the net there are but few requirements l
167. ecify a time pd to send Y N Respond NO Include Suffix amp Smoke Pyro data Y N 10 Respond YES send to Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 11 Enter ANCD Connect ANCD to ANCD 5 49 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS 12 Connect ANCDs and press down arrow b Prepare Target ANCD to 1 Turn ANCD ON full SOI transfer 2 Enter SOI 3 Enter SET 4 Enter RECEIVE b Enter ANCD 6 Press down arrow c Transfer full SOI from 1 Press SEND on ANCD to ANCD Source ANCD 2 Press RCV on Target ANCD RESULTS Press SEND to send WAIT select Soi Radio sUpervisor qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo select Choose Send Receive receive from Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu Connect ANCD to ANCD Press RCV to receive WAIT Processing Please wait shows 96 of bytes sent Sending of SOI data is completed Processing Please wait shows number of bytes sent Receive operation was successful These screens appear only when related data is stored in the ANCD You must respond NO you can transfer either a FULL or QREF SOI but not at the same Do not press SEND on Source ANCD until you are ready to press RCV on Target ANCD then press RCV within about 20 seconds of pressing SEND 5 50 11 5820 890 10 8 5 51 Perform Cold Start Net Opening Special Operator Task 3 DESCRIPTION Operators will be required to perform this special task only
168. ects the radio to be controlled ee Position 1 controls the RT in the A position of the VAA ee Position 2 controls the RT in the B position of the VAA and ee Position is for an RT in the A position of a second VAA OPERATING PROCEDURE To place the control monitor in operation and be assured it is performing properly follow the steps shown in Figure 4 30 below Set VAA CB1 to ON VIC if used to ON RT FCTN to REM Test C M set C M FCTN to TEST check displays must read Gd and or S at end of test Set RADIO switch to RT being controlled CONTROL must indicate if not set to CONTROL and use INIT switch to change Check initial displays RF at LO RT MODE at SC CHAN at 0 COMSEC at PT VAR blank If display shows F7 lift INIT and release Ud update should then appear and controls show as above Figure 4 30 CONTROL MONITOR OPERATION 4 43 11 5820 890 10 8 4 11 Use of Wire Line Adapter 57 COMSEC The Wire Line Adapter HYX 57 when used in conjunction with a KY 57 provides secure radio remote operation capability COMPONENTS The Wire Line Adapter consists of local and remote units which are connected by field wire for operation CABLING Figure 4 31 below shows the set up for remote operation of a SINCGARS radio using an HYX 57 and KY 57 LOCAL REMOTE 57 HYX 57 ol Q 13072 CX 13310 Figure 4 31 Wire Line
169. ed whenever communications with a net station is lost or at risk of being lost due to distance or physical obstacles such as hills and mountains Communications specialists scouts staff drivers and other operators having dual radio configurations should be trained to perform this task whenever it is required The task involves communications between the requesting NCS and the RXMT site and between the RXMT site and the distant station It requires the use of two net IDs or two SC frequencies and physical connection of the two RXMT radios by special retransmission cable Radio and frequency designations are as shown in the RXMT graphic Figure 5 21 ACTIONS RESULTS Obtain required SC FH data Available in ANCD for from for RXMT operation unit SOP Load RT C and RT D with RT C and RT D require SC FH data for mission different SC freq Net IDs Move to RXMT site LOS communications with RT A and RT B are desirable Call NCS on F1 using RT C F1 may be net operational channel or RXMT special Contact distant station Relocation of RXMT site may RT B using RT D be required to contact RT B Provide ERF to RT B if Distant station may require FH required data sync time Contact RT B on F2 using Contact between RT B and RT D RT D on F2 is essential Install RXMT cable between N A RT C and RT D Set RT C and RT D FCTN N A switches to RXMT Set RT C MODE to FH RT A continues to be the NCS on F1 linkage
170. eee eee eee rtt TEARAL LNGDOTTEDLINE PUBLICATION NUMBER TM 11 5820 890 10 8 BE EXACT PIN POINT WHERE IT IS PAGE PARA FIGURE TABLE NO GRAPH NO NO PRINTED NAME GRADE OR TITLE AND TELEPHONE NUMBER DA 1 2028 2 RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS SOMETHING WRONG wm THis PuBLICATION FROM PRINT YOUR UNIT S COMPLETE ADDRESS THEN JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM CAREFULLY TEAR IT OUT FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL DATE SENT PUBLICATION TITLE OPERATOR S MANUAL SINCGARS GROUND COMBAT NET RADIO ICOM PUBLICATION DATE 1 December 1998 IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT SIGN HERE PREVIOUS EDITIONS PS IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR ARE OBSOLETE RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS REVERSE DAFORM 2028 2 FILL IN YOUR UNIT S ADDRESS FOLD BACK DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY A M pe d US MAIL OFFICIAL BUSINESS U S Army CECOM ATTN AMSEL LC LM LT Fort Monmouth New Jersey 07703 5007 wwe we ew eee ew ee eww eww ew ew ee ee eee 10 Order of the Secretary of the Army DENNIS J REIMER General United States Army Official Chief of Staff J
171. eft for the operator to perform Technically the SINCGARS radio is as complex as it is capable Operationally it is simple and easy for the operator to use TASK DIVISION The SINCGARS radio offers many more capabilities than are routinely employed Retransmission RXMT for example is built in SINCGARS capability which is of great value when needed When it is needed not every operator in the unit will be involved Only a select few operators need to be trained on this task It is on this basis that operator tasks have been divided into Primary and Special as discussed below TRAINING MATERIALS The job of the SINCGARS operator has also been simplified by the statement of task procedures in clear easy to follow steps Also the operator is provided a small pocket guide containing abbreviated task procedures covering all operator requirements This pocket guide serves aS a memory jogger for the trained operator precluding any need to memorize any aspect of SINCGARS radio operation 11 5820 890 10 8 5 2 OPERATOR START UP PROCEDURE DRAW EQUIPMENT ANCD ASSEMBLY In a typical peacetime situation the operator will obtain required communications gear from a communications or supply facility Manpack operator s equipment will include a main power battery in addition to all radio components Vehicular radio operator s equipment may include a dismount radio including main power battery in addition
172. ember loads COMSEC and FH data and stands by for receipt of sync time sent electronically by the NCS Traffic Encryption Key TEK and Key Encryption Key KEK required for cipher text communications and over the air rekey operations SC frequency and designated channel used to contact net NCS when caller has non FH radio or has lost contact with the FH net may also be used as normal SC channel Use of FH technique to significantly reduce the impacts of enemy jamming and avoid enemy direction finding capabilities Method by which an NCS electronically updates FH data of net members and transmits sync time for cold start net openings Capabilities of the SINCGARS SIP radio in which forward error correction speed range and accuracy of data transmission are materially improved Four enhanced data rates 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N and two new modes Packet and RS 232 are provided by the SIP ASIP radio Packet data mode can be used only with the FBCB2 system EXT an option found under the RCU key of the SIP radio represents a future capability of the radio and is not currently used ASIP radio is in EXT mode automatically when proper interface and software is detected When the radio is set to this mode the front panel controls of the RT are disabled allowing control to be performed from the peripheral device Ensure you do not accidentally select EXT mode ICOM Radio versions of the SINCGARS radio having integrated COMSEC but no
173. en controls Check for loose controls Check for frozen controls Check for missing controls Check for presence Check for proper installation of cable Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cable Turn LS 671 Power Switch to ON Turn VAA CB1 to ON Check that VAA DS1 lights Check that LS 671 Power Indicator Lamp lights Check ability to turn RT OFF ON from LS 671 Check control of LS 671 volume Check control of handset volume when connected to LS 671 The Loudspeaker LS 671 is not essential to the operation of the SINCGARS radio with which it is used Problems found with the LS 671 during PMCS are corrected or reported to Unit Maintenance but they do not result in Not Fully Mission Capable determinations 8 20 11 5820 890 10 8 8 2e Automated Control Device ANCD AN CYZ 10 MAINTENANCE CONCEPT OPERATOR MAINTENANCE BATTERY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE The maintenance concept for the ANCD is for the unit level maintainer to requisition and repair all external parts in accordance with TM 11 5810 394 14 amp P If the problem is internal Unit Maintenance personnel will use BIT software to determine the operational status of the ANCD If the BIT confirms that the ANCD faulty the unit will turn in the faulty ANCD through normal supply channels to the COMSEC depot The unit will then requisition a replacement ANCD through normal supply channels Also replacement ANCDs
174. ent is covered briefly and references are cited for each Because of the critical Importance of batteries to the operation of SINCGARS radios and associated equipment a Battery Requirements section provides general guidance regarding the number of hours of service that may be expected of various types of batteries under differing operational conditions 1 Maintenance Forms Records And Reports DA Pam 738 750 SF 364 ROD SF 361 TDR 1 2 Reports of Maintenance and Unsatisfactory Equipment Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by DA Pam 738 750 as contained in Maintenance Management Update Reporting of Item and Packaging Discrepancies Fill out and forward SF 364 Report of Discrepancy ROD as prescribed AR 735 11 2 DLAR 4140 55 SECNAVINST 4355 18 AFR 400 54 MCO 4430 3 Transportation Discrepancy Report TDR SF 361 Fill out and forward Transportation Discrepancy Report TDR SF 361 as prescribed in AR 55 38 NAVSUPINST 4610 33C AFR 75 18 MCO P4610 19D DLAR 4500 15 11 5820 890 10 8 1 36 Consolidated Index Of Army Publications And Blank Forms DA Pam 25 30 Refer to the latest issue of DA Pam 25 30 to determine whether there are new editions changes or additional publications pertaining to the equipment 1 3c Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations EIR SF 368 EIR If your radio or associated equipment needs im
175. ent to use the same KEK The Alternate NCS notes which stations still need the OTAR keeps one channel on the old TEK and sends the MK OTAR to remaining Target NCS as contact is re established or at a prescribed time 6 25 11 5820 890 10 8 6 41 Send to Operators Using AK Method of OTAR Special NCS Task 4 DESCRIPTION This procedure enables an NCS to transfer electronically a TEK not a KEK directly from the NCS ANCD to net member radios In the AK method the TEK transferred to net member radios automatically and instantaneously replaces the TEK being used Also the KEK in net member radios is automatically updated changed during the AK procedure After sending a TEK by AK OTAR the Source NCS must load the new TEK While the AK method of OTAR requires no action on the part of receiving net members it is quite demanding of the Source NCS DETAILED FLOWCHART SEND TEK TO NET OPERATORS USING AK METHOD OF OTAR SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare Source NCS 1 Set FCTN to LD N A radio to send AK OTAR 4 4 Set DATA to OFF b Prepare Source NCS 1 Turn ANCD ON select ANCD to sent AK OTAR Soi Radio supervisor Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 2 3 Enter COMSEC vG Ld Rv Ak Mk vU 4 Enter AK Select key quit name number 5 Press PgU PgDN to Select key quit KEK s desired then press name number ENTR 6 Enter QUIT Select key quit name number
176. epeat the until a response is received switch COMSEC to CT to receive the NCS response use single channel mode and receive and store an ERF when it is sent A simpler method of re entering the net when the passive method does not work is the Hot Start procedure See Primary Operator Task 3 ACTIONS RESULTS 1 Load CUE and MAN freqs into RT 2 Set CHAN to CUE and COMSEC to PT 1 Press PTT for 4 or 5 seconds 2 Set COMSEC to CT at 3 Wart for NCS to respond 4 Repeat every 15 seconds until NCS responds See Primary Operator Task 1 CUE signal goes through only when RT is set to PT There is no need to speak NCS Alt NCS will respond in CT on CUE frequency CUE signal goes through only when the net is quiet You have no way of knowing if net is busy or quiet c Obtain ERF 1 When NCS responds request an ERF 2 Receive and store ERF when sent by NCS 3 Re enter the net Responding NCS will direct you to the MAN channel See Special Operator Task 3 for detailed procedure CUE and ERF late net entry is completed 5 55 11 5820 890 10 8 5 51 Conduct Retransmission RXMT Operations Special Operator Task 6 DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART SUBTASKS a Prepare to perform RXMT mission b Establish comm from RXMT site c Initiate RT A to RT B RXMT communications 5 56 This special operator task may be requir
177. er DESCRIPTION 2 4 DESCRIPTION 2 4d VOICE DATA FH amp CT Manpack Radio SIP manpack radios including those in dismount kits of AN VRC 88A D and AN VRC 90A D configurations require batteries for their main power source and hold up memory retention function This paragraph offers users of SIP radios with general guidelines regarding the number of hours of a particular type usage each battery is expected to provide These times are based on computations as well as experience Actual battery life will vary depending upon how long the battery has been in storage and the temperature at the time the battery is being used Even so these times offer you a basis for planning your battery requirements Batteries used for main power in the SIP radio are Battery Rechargeable BB 390A U 1 Battery Rechargeable BB 590 U E Battery Non Rechargeable BB 5590 U Lithium The Hold Up Battery used SIP radios is Battery Non Rechargeable BA 5372 U Lithium ESTIMATED BATTERY LIFE USING BA 5590 RFPWR AT HI SETTING Table 2 5 Manpack Radio Main Power RT 1523 RT 1523A RT 1523B 1523 RT 1523D RT 1523E Use of HRCRD reduces times shown by approximately one half hour Represents 9 minutes of receiving and monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting Represents 2 minutes of receiving and monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting In STBY HT draws power from ma
178. er TMPD Enter Time Pd gt 4 Select time period desired qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Enter QREF Scroll to net desired note SC Se needed b Prepare RT for SC freq Set COMSEC to PT loading Set MODE to SC 4 Set CHAN to CUE MAN or CHAN 1 6 5 30 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Load SC freqs 1 Press FREQ RT display shows 00000 or 30000 2 Press CLR RT display shows Enter 5 digit SC freqs RT display shows X X X X X d Store SC freqs Press STO within 7 RT display blinks once seconds e Prepare to communicate Set FCTN to SQ ON SC PT Set CHAN to CUE MAN or N A CHAN 1 6 3 Communicate in SC PT N A mode when desired ANCD contains CUE MAN and some SC frequencies Other SC frequencies to be loaded in Channels 1 6 must be obtained from your NCS or SigO Operators normally do not load a CUE frequency only NCS and alternate NCSs need to receive CUE messages The MAN frequency must be loaded if the Cold Start net opening procedure is to be used Channels 1 thru 6 are loaded with SC frequencies only when single channel communications are known to be mission requirements In a typical frequency hopping net which uses the Hot Start net opening procedure it is not necessary for the operator to load any SC frequencies at least until a specific need arises 5 31 11 5820 890 10 8 5 4e Load COMSEC FH Data Sync Time into RT Using ICOM F
179. er The Air Rekey OTAR operations both Automatic Keying AK and Manual Keying MK Keying methods are fully supported by the ANCD The method of transmitting SOI information from one location to another electronically known as broadcast is also fully supported by the ANCD COMSEC keys FH data and SOI information can be sent from one location to another through use of the ANCD in conjunction with a Secure Telephone Unit STU The Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR can be loaded with the required operational key through use of the ANCD The ANCD is a hand held electronic device The ANCD is housed in a weather resistant case that provides a fill connector cryptographic ignition key CIK port and battery access cover as the only external openings A hinged lid allows access to the ANCD LCD display A 35 key keypad enables the operator receive store transfer and use ANCD data An internal ANCD lamp enables viewing of the display and keypad when night goggles are employed The ANCD will retain stored data for up to two minutes to enable the operator to change batteries when required Lengthis 16 1 CM 6 3 IN Widthis 11 2 CM 4 4 Height is 5 0 CM 2 0 IN The ANCD uses three 3 volt lithium batteries With batteries installed the ANCD weighs approximately 2 pounds 11 5820 890 10 8 3 2 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR AN PSN 11 3 28 PLGR Capabilities LOCATION TIME
180. erator Preparation Tasks PREPARATION TASK 1 PRIMARY TASK 1 PRIMARY TASK 2 PRIMARY TASK 3 5 28 Select RT Preparation Setting from MENU Required to set the ASIP radio to proper settings for other tasks MENU selections are Volume Channel Power Mode and COMSEC These settings will need to change as operationally necessary Load Single Channel Frequencies into RT Required for use of single channel communications participation in Cold Start net opening use of CUE and ERF method of late net entry and single channel frequency updates Load COMSEC FH Data and Sync Time into RT Using ICOM Fill Required for secure frequency hopping communications participation in Hot Start net opening COMSEC FH data updates and without sync time participation in Cold Start net opening Perform Hot Start Net Opening Required when the net has been down for any reason and for any period of time and is now to become operational at a prescribed time Operators load their RTs with all required COMSEC keys FH data and sync time At the prescribed time they call the NCS and enter the net The Hot Start procedure may also be used when an individual operator has been out of the net for any reason and wishes to re enter without resort to the CUE and ERF method of late net entry 11 5820 890 10 8 PRIMARY TASK 4 Perform Passive Late Net Entry Required when an operator s radio sync time becomes greater than plus or minus 4 se
181. erfaces SYSTEMS CONNECTOR ANTENNA CONNECTOR GPS CONNECTOR AUD FILL CONNECTOR J3 AUD DATA CONNECTOR 4 Figure 2 9 SIP RT Connectors J5 GPS Located on the back of the SIP RT the GPS J5 connector provides an interface of the VAA GPS connector J4 AUD DATA The J4 AUDIDATA connector supports general data communications at SINCGARS Data Rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 and 16 000 BPS and Enhanced Data Rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS The RS 232 interface allows transmission of data via SINCGARS SIP radios using computers and commercial software If not using Packet PCKT data mode or the internet controller INC feature of the SIP radio all data devices must be connected to the AUD DATA port not to the SIP VAA J3 AUD FILL Handsets used with the SIP RT may be connected to the AUD DATA or AUD FILL connector NOTE Handsets will not function if connected to the front of the SIP VAA 11 5820 890 10 8 2 2e Connectors ASIP RT 1 System This connector provides RT power and signaling interfaces GPS CONNECTOR SYSTEMS CONNECTOR y P1 AUXILIARY CONNECTOR AUD FILL CONNECTOR AUD DATA CONNECTOR J3 RXMT Figure 2 10 ASIP RT Connectors J6 Auxiliary Used to connect HRCRD handset and two wire adapter J5 GPS Enables a PLGR to be connected to a manpack radio J3 AUD DATA The J4 AUD DATA connector supports general data communications at
182. es ICOM fill now load YES Problem is solved RT NO See Unit Maintenance Where ACTION is to replace ANCD fill cable it is anticipatedhat the operator will borrow such item for the purpose of troubleshooting If borrowing is not feasible it will be necessary for the operator to contact Unit Maintenance to obtain a substitute item or get assistance with the problem 11 5820 890 10 8 OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2 Operator is Unable to Contact the Net NCS STEPS ACTIONS Verify Correct RT Control Settings d IsFCTNewitchsettoSQ switch set to SQ YES Continue ON NO Go to SQ ON cont 2 15 CHAN switch set to net YES Continue operational channel NO Change CHAN cont 3 COMSEC set to CT YES Continue or PT if in use NO Reset COMSEC cont 4 15 MODE set to FH YES Continue or SC if in use NO Change MODE cont Is RF PWR set properly for YES Continue NCS location NO Change RF PWR cont Is VOL set to hear NCS or YES Go to Step 2 net traffic NO Reset VOL go to Step 2 Verify Correct COMSEC Is TEK loaded in operational YES Continue Key is Loaded channel NO Reload scroll TEK cont 2 Can NCS now be YES Problem is solved contacted NO Go to Step 3 Verify Correct Net ID is 1 s correct Net ID loaded in YES Continue Used operational channel NO Reload FH data cont Can NCS now be YES Problem is solved contacted NO Go to Step 4 Verify Cor
183. esults are shown as ANCD displays dark bordered boxes or as RT displays in the form of RT display shows Where appropriate results are expressed as explanations of occurrences TRANSFER PARTIAL COMSEC FH DATA ANCD TO ANCD Prepare Source ANCD for partial data transfer 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database 3 Enter SEND send to Radio Ancd Stu Pc 4 Enter ANCD Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod Enter LOADSET select Loadset name ENTR 7 ACTIONS RESULTS Soi Radio sUpervisor sEtup Comsec Time Scroll PgUP PgDN Do you want to include time loadset desired EE Y N Respond YES unless you Connect to ANCD and press want to omit time SEND WAIT 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS b Prepare Target ANCD for 1 Turn ANCD ON select partial data transfer Soi Radio supervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter RECEIVE receive from Ancd Cfd Stu PC Mx 4 Enter ANCD Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod 5 Enter LOADSET Connect to ANCD and press RCV WAIT c Perform data transfer 1 Press SEND on Source Transfer successful ANCD 2 Press RCV on Target select Replace iNsert ANCD data item name 3 Enter REPLACE Transfer successful Task IS completed When replacing or overwriting keys new COMSEC and FH data must be named the same as those to be replaced or overwritten
184. et AN VIC 1 V Adapter Wire Line HYX 57 TSEC 11 5820 890 10 8 ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation AAL ACK AD AK ANCD ANT APPL ATTN AUD BATT BII BIT BPS BRK BRT CAGEC CCl CDR CFD CH CHAN CHG CID CIK CKT CLR CLSGN Description additional authorization list acknowledge analog data automatic keying automated net control device antenna application attention audio battery basic issue item built in test bits per second breaker bright commercial and government entity code controlled cryptographic item commander common fill device channel channel change combat identification cryptographic ignition key circuit clear call sign Abbreviation CM CMSC COMSEC 5 CT CVC DA DF DN DTD ECCM EDM EIR ENTR EPLRS ER ERF ESET EXT FCTN FH FH M FHMUX FIST V Description control monitor centimeter communications security component of end item communications exercise communications security sign countersign cipher text combat vehicle crew Department of the Army direction finding down data transfer device electronic counter counter measures enhanced data mode equipment improvement recommendation enter enhanced position location reporting system error electronic remote fill FH data for one channel external function frequency hopping frequency hopping master frequency hopping multiplexer
185. eys FH Perform Primary Operator Task 2 data and sync time 2 Advise operators when net is to be opened Open the net 1 Respond to individual Each operator calls as soon as operator calls 2 to enter the net 2 Admit individual operators When all operators have into CT FH net called Hot Start is complete The ANCD automatically converts current date to a two digit Julian Date There is no action required on the part of the operator Prepare net operators for Ensure net ANCDs are Hot Start net opening properly loaded Unit SOP should specify if net RTs are to be loaded by individual operators or by communications specialists and designated NCOs Centralized loading of radios may be an attractive solution when the state of individual operator training is a consideration 11 5820 890 10 8 6 31 Conduct Cold Start Net Opening Primary NCS Task 4 The Cold Start net opening procedure has for most units been replaced by the simpler less demanding Hot Start method covered in Primary NCS Task 3 above The Cold Start method remains an option for NCSs to use if desired The Cold Start net opening procedure requires operators to load their radios with COMSEC keys and FH data but not sync time Sync time is passed electronically from the NCS to net members by ERF Coordination is essential to ensure that all operators are ready when the ERF is sent and that they properly store the data While the Cold Start me
186. fer a TEK not a KEK electronically over the air rekey OTAR to other NCSs This capability 1 useful when the tactical situation or terrain makes it impossible or impractical to pass new TEK by physical connection of ANCD to ANCD Receiving NCSs store the new TEK in their ANCDs The new TEK can then be passed to operators by physical transfer Special NCS Tasks 3 and 5 are performed together by Source and Target NCSs respectively SEND TEK TO OTHER NCSs USING MK METHOD OF OTAR SUBTASKS a Prepare Source NCS radio to send MK OTAR b Prepare Source ANCD to send MK OTAR 6 24 ACTIONS Set FCTN to SQ ON Set MODE to FH M Set COMSEC to CT Set DATA to OFF 1 Turn ANCD ON 2 Enter RADIO 3 Enter COMSEC 4 Enter MK 5 Press PgDN to display and ENTR to select 6 X Connect Source ANCD to RT using fill cable RESULTS N A N A N A N A select Soi Radio supervisor Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time Vg Ld Rv Ak vU Select key name number Connect to RT and press SEND WAIT N A 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Prepare Target NCSs to 1 _ Say Standby for MK OTAR Target NCSs are alerted CT contact receive MK OTAR ACK is confirmed 2 After ACK say Make Readies Target NCSs to receive MK Special NCS Task 5 OTAR preparations ACK when ready to receive MK OTAR After ACK will Provides final
187. form an ICOM fill including sync time using your ANCD The RT computes the battery condition by measuring the time spent in the receive and transmit modes Operating the RT in receive mode for 210 minutes increases the battery condition value by one Transmitting for 24 minutes also increases the value by one The battery should be replaced when the value is 11 The Battery Life Indicator uses 12 to indicate the power exhaustion point not hours For estimated hours of battery life for different uses se Chapter 8 This FROM DISPLAY clock shows that for normal 9 1 duty cycle operations a reading of 3 means you have used about 1 4 of your battery a reading of 6 means half the power has been used up 9 indicates it is 3 4 gone and 12 represents exhaustion These are rough estimates only and they apply to operators not NCS or other heavy radio users A 6 could mean power exhaustion for a manpack NCS operator Figure 5 23 Battery Life Indicator Chart 5 66 11 5820 890 10 8 5 76 Loading and Clearing Offset Frequencies DEFINITION LOADING PROCEDURE CLEARING PROCEDURE The SINCGARS radio allows single channel frequencies to be offset by plus or minus 5 or 10 KHz When operating in the single channel mode this capability can be employed to help work through jamming or other interferences Use the following procedure to load an offset frequency e Load regular SC frequency Primary Operator
188. from the loudspeaker VAA CB1 must be set to ON When pushed in this control adjusts the audio level of the handset When pulled out it adjusts the volume of the loudspeaker Turning the control clockwise increases the volume counterclockwise decreases it The Power Indicator Lamp lights when VAA CB1 is ON and LS 671 Power Switch is turned on 11 5820 890 10 8 5 31 Vehicular Intercommunications Set VIC CONTROLS The main control box of the VIC Audio Frequency Amplifier AM 1780 provides five controls for main power intercom accent radio transmission and installation control Crew boxes C 2297 and C 2298 provide two controls each a function selector switch and a volume control Afer oes LA INT ACCENT TRANS CREW _ 9 9 LISTENING SILENCE INT ONLY ES OTHER 50 RETRANS INSTALLATION AUDIO INPUT LINE eee pee AMPLIFIER AUDIO FREQUENCY AM 1780 VRC OR 7046 VOLUME CONTROL INTER CONTROL INTER COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION SET C 2297 VRC SET C 2298 VRC Figure 5 20 VIC CONTROLS 5 25 11 5820 890 10 8 1780 CONTROLS AND USES CONTROLS PURPOSE POWER CKT BKR A two position ON OFF switch allows the user to initiate and terminate Circuit Breaker power to the VIC system ON OFF Supplies power to and removes power from crew boxes C 2297 and C 2298 MAIN PWR T
189. ge Radio plus Dismount Manpack Radio 2 54 Long Range LR Radio Components AN VRC 90A D F CG 3855 VRC J2 POWER AMPLIFIER o n m o PR 2 2 22 J2 POWER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO MOUNTING BASE CONNECTOR J3 DATA 5 RT 1523E AUD DATA J1 POWER AMPLIFIER LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO MOUNTING BASE CONNECTOR J3 DATA A J5 as ALININATA Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523 A B C D E Mounting Base MB MT 6352 A part of installation kit Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 A B C D E Vehicular Antenna AS 3900 3916 part of installation kit Handset HS H 250 part of installation kit Loudspeaker LS LS 671 part of installation kit Power Amplifier PA 7238 Cable W2 connects RT ANT to PA Cable W4 connects RT to VAA Antenna Cable CG 3856 part of installation kit Loudspeaker Cable CX 13292 part of installation kit Power Cable part of installation kit Figure 2 15 Long Range LR Radio Components 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5e Short Range Long Range Radio Components AN VRC 89A D F CG 3855 VRC J1 POWER AMPLIFIER AUD DATA RT 1523E ANT LOUDSPEAKER 2 7 J CONNECTED TO J2 POWER gt TOS MOUNTING BASE AMPLIFIER E m DA
190. ge marks so you can quickly refer to that information TABLE OF CONTENTS Refer to the Table of Contents to find out where information can be found The Table of Contents lists each chapter and major paragraph showing subject paragraph and page numbers CHAPTER CONTENTS For ease of reference each chapter begins with a chapter table of contents showing the major paragraphs and sub paragraphs contained in that chapter Paragraph and page numbers are also provided SUBJECT INDEX A subject matter index may be found at the rear of the manual Subjects are listed alphabetically by page number The index is a good place to start if you are looking for a specific item of information ABBREVIATIONS For sake of brevity this manual makes generous use of abbreviations Abbreviations are identified with their complete meaning at first use and frequently thereafter If you need the meaning of an abbreviation it may by found in the alphabetical listing of abbreviations found in at the rear of the manual GLOSSARY You may refer to the Glossary also found Appendix to find the meaning of unfamiliar terms NOMENCLATURE CROSS Although you will most frequently use common names for REFERENCE LIST items of SINCGARS equipment if you need to know the official nomenclature for an item it may be found in the Nomenclature Cross Reference List in Appendix E POCKET GUIDES Operators and NCS Pocket Guides supplement this manual with information you
191. h to be set to the FH M position in order to change the net ID of any channel Skip this step unless it is required If you have to switch to FH M be sure to return to FH as soon as the procedure for changing net ID is completed RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio will allow you to change only the last two digits of the net ID Otherwise the procedure for changing net IDs is the same 5 61 11 5820 890 10 8 5 6 SPECIAL OPERATOR TASKS SIP ASIP GENERAL In addition to the eight special operator tasks there are two Special SIP ASIP Operator Tasks These special SIP ASIP related tasks use the SIP ASIP RT as an RCU and send data from one computer to another over a SINCGARS secure frequency hopping net using RS 232 enhanced data feature 5 6a Use SIP ASIP RT as an RCU Special Operator Task 9 y RESULT Ensure SIP ASIP RT and RCU RT are Prepares SIP ASIP RT and RCU RT for loaded remote operations install two wire kink from RCU RT to remoted radio Set remoted radio FCTN switch to the REM position Set RCU RT switch to SQ Set RCU RT DATA to any position Press key on RCU RT and select the RCU option Wait for 7 seconds then note when RCU RT display blinks Set RCU RT FCTN switch to the REM positron Press RCU RT CALL key and PTT at same time for 4 7 seconds Set RCU RT to SQ ON This enables the RCU RT to control the remoted rad
192. hange net ID All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator Sync time may be loaded electronically from an Automated Net Control Device ANCD a Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR manually via the keypad or by ERF RT will accept ERF if sync time is less than 100 days different from net sync time New keypad with SIP features GPS connector AUX connector for HRCRD 2 wire adapter Figure 2 7 RT 1523E Features Differences between RT models reflect manufacturer s options plus product improvements based on experience They primarily affect radio performance and have minor impact on operator tasks and procedures 11 5820 890 10 8 12 2 TECHNICAL 2 2 SIP ASIP Receiver Transmitter RT Enhanced Data New Data Modes RCU Function GPS Time Loading Internal FSK Detector 2 2b SIP ASIP RT Keypad General RCU P The SIP ASIP RT offers enhanced data rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS where the N indicates new or enhanced rates The advantages of these enhanced data rates are better accuracy great speed longer range and improved forward error correction Two new data modes are also provided Packet PCKT which supports operations involving FBCB2 hardware and software and RS 232 by which data messages can be sent from SIP ASIP RT to SIP ASIP RT using computers and commercial communications software a widely used file transfer protocol The SIP ASIP
193. he time of opening and ensuring that all net members receive the loadset to be used and correct sync time The operator participating in a Hot Start net opening performs an ICOM fill COMSEC key FH data and sync time prior to the announced time of net opening That is the only preparation the operator needs to make At the prescribed time for net opening each net operator calls the NCS and enters the secure FH net The Hot Start net opening procedure is completed once all members have entered the net An alternative procedure is for the NCS to call net members at opening time but requirements remain the same Sed Figure 4 8 below or Primary Operator Task 3 Perform Hot Start Net Opening for detailed procedures Load RT using ICOM fill procedure Load sync time manually if required Call NCS and enter CT FH net When all operators have entered the net the Hot Start net opening is complete Figure 4 8 HOT START NET OPENING Because it is simple and easy to execute the Hot Stat t method is generally preferred for net openings A major advantage of the Hot Star t procedure is that coordination requirements are minimized and operators have maximum latitude regarding RT loading and net entry The Hot Start procedure also recognizes that some operators the commander s driver for example may not be available at the announced net opening time Such special operators can enter the net at whatever time they are availa
194. hes to re enter the net without resort to the CUE and ERF method of late net entry This task involves two basic steps loading the radio with COMSEC keys FH data and sync time by use of the ICOM fill procedure Primary Operator Task 2 and calling the NCS in secure frequency hopping mode to request net entry DETAILED FLOWCHART PERFORM HOT START NET OPENING ACTIONS 1 Perform ICOM Fill Primary Opr Task 2 SUBTASKS RESULTS a Load RT with COMSEC FH data sync time RT channels 6 are loaded with COMSEC FH sync time Load sync time manually N A if required by RT version 1 Call NCS using CT FH N A NCS responds mode b Enter net Hot Start net opening 5 completed for this operator 2 Request permission to enter the net If the message RT cannot accept time from ANCD appears go to subtasks c and d below to manually load Julian Date and sync time Once that has been accomplished contact your NCS and enter the net 5 34 SUBTASKS c Load Julian Date JD in RT d Load Sync Time in RT ACTIONS 1 Turn ANCD ON Enter RADIO in ANCD 3 Enter TIME in ANCD 4 Press TIME on RT keypad one time Press CLR on RT keypad Enter XX JD from ANCD Press STO on RT keypad Press down arrow on ANCD see c 3 above Press TIME on RT keypad two times Press CLR on RT keypad Enter HH from ANCD Enter MM minute ahead of ANCD
195. his switch provides three power settings normal intercom only and OFF Main Power OFF Removes all power from the VIC and radio system INT ONLY Allows communications among crewmembers but does not allow use of Intercom Only radios NORM Supplies power to intercom and radios and is the normal position used Normal for VIC INT ACCENT When ON this switch reduces the volume level of radio traffic intercom Intercom Accent volume level remains unchanged RADIO TRANS This switch allows selection of transmit capabilities or listening silence Radio Transmission CDR CREW Allows all crewmembers to transmit on radios CDR ONLY Allows commander only to transmit on radios LISTENING SILENCE Prevents transmission on radios INSTALLATION This three position switch is for use of maintenance personnel only Crewmembers should not move switch setting 5 26 11 5820 890 10 8 CREWBOX C 2297 amp C 2298 CONTROLS AND USES CONTROLS PURPOSE FUNCTION This primary switch controls access to intercom and radios A and B SELECTOR Crew can Talk and listen on Intercom Talk and listen on radio and Listen only on radio Crew can Talk and listen on Intercom and Talk and listen on radio This position is not used when the SINCGARS radio is used with the VIC System Ignore the B position on crewboxes Commander can Talk and listen on intercom and Talk and listen on r
196. if the NCS elects to use the Cold Start net opening procedure Hot Start is the more commonly used net opening procedure Cold Start procedures require operators to load their radios with COMSEC keys and FH data stand by at the prescribed time communicate with the NCS on the MAN channel set RT FCTN to LD note when ERF is received and press STO and channel number to retain data Any failure in the ERF process prevents the operator concerned from communicating in the frequency hopping mode Because the Cold Start procedure is more demanding in coordination and operator requirements units normally use the Hot Start procedure DETAILED FLOWCHART SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare radio to receive 1 Load MAN SC See Primary Operator Task 1 an ERF frequency into RT Load RT with required See Primary Operator Task 2 COMSEC FH data Set FCTN to LD Set COMSEC to CT N A Set CHAN to MAN Display shows COLD ready to receive an ERF 6 Set MODE to FH b Receive and store ERF 1 Standby until NCS sends the ERF 2 Note signal display Display shows HF activate 3 Press STO Display shows STO _ 4 Press X 1 6 Display shows channel entered 5 51 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Make communications Set CHAN to X 1 6 Channel where ERF was stored check Set FCTN to SQ ON N A Call NCS or respond to Cold Start net opening is NCS call completed The
197. ify and locate the item The last line for each item indicates the CAGEC in parentheses followed by the part number d Column 4 Unit of Measure U M This column indicates the measure used in performing the actual operational maintenance function This measure is expressed by a two character alphabetical abbreviation e g ea in pr e Column 5 Quantity Required Qty Reqd This column indicates the quantity of the item authorized to be used with on the equipment 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF END ITEM MOUNTING ADAPTER CARRYING CASE RECEIVER TRANSMITTER 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF END ITEM Continued CONTROL CABLE RF CABLE CX 13291 CG 3856 9 D KS W2 CABLE W4 CABLE an e a MOUNTING BASE 6353 POWER CABLE BETWEEN MOUNTS CX 13303 SPECIAL PURPOSE CABLE CX 13314 18 gt 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION 1 COMPONENTS OF END ITEM Continued HANDHELD REMOTE CONTROL RADIO DEVICE W4 CABLE C 12493 U 17 AX i Og 8523 19 RECEIVER TRANSMITTER RADIO RT 1523E C U 20 1 Illus No 19 18 20 12 17 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF END ITEM Continued National Stock Number 5820 01 267 9482 5820 01 421 0801 5820 01 451 8252 5985 01 235 9189 6160 01 284 4200 6160 01 304 2034
198. ile is stored in your ANCD ur Do not press SEND on Source ANCD until you are ready to press RCV on Target ANCD then press RCV within about 20 seconds of pressing SEND NOTE See Special Operator Task 2 Alternate if you wish to transfer a full SOI information file 5 48 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5e Transfer Full SOI Information ANCD to ANCD Special Operator Task 2 Alternate DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART SUBTASKS a Prepare Source ANCD for full SOI transfer Although the principal SOI transfer task involves only QREF files there are operators who will require full SOI information Special Operator Task 2 Alternate is a variation of Task 2 allowing transfer of complete SOI files Dissemination within the unit is still accomplished by transferring SOI information for one ANCD to another When this special task is not performed by communications specialists or designated NCOs operators who need the full SOI information file must be trained to perform this task ACTIONS RESULTS Turn ANCD ON select Soi Radio supervisor Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Enter SET select Choose Send Receive Enter SEND Scroll and press ENTR to select Set Press down arrow and Set name nr scroll to set desired Edn name tp ENTR Press ENTR to select Do you want to transfer QREF Respond NO Do you want to specify groups to send Y N Respond NO Do you want to sp
199. ile your radio is in late net entry mode your sync time will be thrown farther out of sync RT 1523 only 4 6c Hot Start Option NEXT EASIEST SITUATION PROCEDURE In this option the operator connects the ANCD to the RT and repeats the ICOM fill procedure It is easy to perform and takes very little time A typical situation where an operator would select this option is when the cause of being out of the net is uncertain In short the problem could be with data fill as well as with sync time The procedure is to select the proper menu items four on the ANCD connect the ANCD to the RT and press LOAD on the RT keypad Sync time must be loaded manually if other than RT 1523A B C D E is being used Having repeated the ICOM fill the operator merely follows Hot Start procedure and re enters the net or Primary Operator Task 3 Perform Hot Start Net Opening for detailed procedures If possible check ANCD sync time against PLGR GPS time If it has been more than 24 hours since GPS time was loaded into the ANCD time difference may exceed 4 seconds In the worst case load ANCD time and use passive late net entry 11 5820 890 10 8 4 64 Reloading Sync Time ALSO EASY SITUATION PROCEDURE This method calls for reloading of sync time whether as a part of an ICOM fill by electronic transfer from a PLGR or through manually loading new sync time via the RT keypad The typical
200. ill Primary Operator Task 2 DESCRIPTION This task is required in preparation for a Hot Start net opening and without sync time for COMSEC FH data updates This task may also be performed in preparation for a Cold Start net opening by omitting sync time Performance of this task involves the use of an ANCD as a source of COMSEC keys FH data hopset TSK and net ID and sync time By use of the ICOM fill procedure COMSEC FH data and sync time are simultaneously loaded into all six channels of the SINCGARS radio Upon completion of the ICOM fill the radio is fully prepared for secure frequency hopping communications DETAILED FLOWCHART LOAD COMSEC FH DATA SYNC TIME INTO RT USING ICOM FILL SUBTASK ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare HE loteca dn RT to receive an SetCOMSECtoCT COMSEC to CT PTT twice to clear ICOM fill alarm 2 Set FCTN to LD 3 Set CHAN to MAN 4 Set MODE to FH Display shows FILL O 5 Set DATA to OFF Display shows OFF 5 32 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASK ACTIONS RESULTS b Prepare ANCD to perform ICOM fill 1 ANCD ON select SOi Radio supervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter SEND send to Radio Ancd Stu PC 4 Enter RADIO select Nonicom Abn Haveq 5 Enter ICOM Connect to RT AUD FILL Connector 6 Connec
201. ill increase ranges for both voice and data transmissions Enemy jamming and mutual interference conditions will degrade ranges In data transmissions use of lower baud rate increases the range EDM Data rates are available on and D model radios 2 31 11 5820 890 10 8 2 6 SINGLE RADIO MOUNT SRM RADIO 87 2 6a Components of Short Range SR Radio in Single Radio Mount AN VRC 87C 1 LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO SINGLE RADIO MOUNT CONNECTOR J3 Receiver Transmitter FIT RT 1523 A B Mounting Base Electrical Equipment MT 6576 SRM part of installation kit Power Supply Adapter PSA MX 10862 Vehicular Antenna AS 3900 3916 part of installation kit Handset H 250 part of installation kit Loudspeaker LS LS 671 part of installation kit Battery Tray CY 8664 selected configurations only part of installation kit a Battery Box CY 8523A B installed in Battery Tray b Battery BA 5590 installed in Battery Box Cable CX13314 connects RT to PSA Antenna Cable CG 3856 part of installation kit Loudspeaker Cable CX 13292 part of installation kit HT 1523A versions with serial numbers below 20200 cannot be used with SRM configurations if either a VIC or LS 671 is used with that SRM radio Figure 2 20 Components of Short Range Radio in Single Radio Mount SRM 2 32 2 66 Physical Data for Single Radio Mount SRM Radio
202. ime method of late net entry 4 20 Remote Control Unit RCU 2 35 memes cid ec 2 35 Hold up battery requirements n n KI 8 26 Main power battery requirements a 52108 8 25 REPRE dd 5 18 Perfonmanicedata 2 36 Physical data bed be ede du d 2 36 Remoting capabilities Hee 4 34 Using 4 42 Using Loudspeaker 19 671 n e 4 41 Using Receiver Transmitter RT Using Remote Control Device C2329 GRA 39 4 45 Using Remote Control Unit RCU rb erroe e 4 34 Using Wire Line Adapter HYX 57 4 44 Reporting equipment improvement recommendations 1 3 Reporting errors and recommending improvements 1 3 Respond to CUE calls task bue edant 6 17 Retransmission RXMT operations sone eden e eR an Capability MOdES eed 4 29 General o PM Procedures RT M ss g s eiiis 2 12 Physical Data e n KK HH hh rr Scanning capability Scope of manual n 1 1 Scrolling communications security COMSEC keys
203. in battery not the HUB 11 5820 890 10 8 24e RCU RT ESTIMATED BATTERY LIFE BA 5590 FOR RT USED AS RCU Table 2 6 SIP ASIP RT used As RCU Main Power RT VOICE DATA RT 1523C 1523D RT 1523E FH amp CT Standby STBY 3 Months 3 Months 2 4f Hold Up Battery Normal OPR ESTIMATED HOLD UP BATTERY LIFE BA 5372 SIP RADIO Table 2 7 SIP ASIP Radio Hold Up Battery CAUTION SINCGARS HUB and ANCD batteries look similar and can be physically interchanged The HUB battery is 6 5 Volts while ANCD batteries are 3 Volts each If HUB batteries 3 of them are mistakenly placed in the ANCD it will be destroyed Placing one ANCD battery in the RT HUB position will cause the RT to lose its fill of data Therefore be sure you know which battery goes where Always read the label before installing either HUB or ANCD batteries 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5 VEHICULAR RADIOS AN VRC 87A D F thru 92A D F 2 5a Vehicular Radios General CONFIGURATIONS There are six configurations of vehicular radios They are Short Range SR Radio AN VRC 87A D F Short Range Radio with Dismount AN VRC 88 A D F Long Range LR Radio AN VRC 90A D F Short Range Long Range Radio AN VRC 89A D F 5 Range Long Range Radio with Dismount AN VRC 91A D F Long Range Long Range Radio AN VRC 92A D F The A D F in SINCGARS radio nomenclature means that these are ICOM radios Do not confu
204. inate for approximately five seconds after power on and then extinguish upon successful completion of the self test The POWER ON indicator should stay illuminated FHMUX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES Place the POWER toggle YES Continue switch into the ON position NO Contact Maintenance and verify POWER ON indicator is illuminated Verify that the four YES Continue BIT FAULT indicators NO a Make note of the illuminate for approximately BIT FAULT Indicators five seconds and then that are illuminated extinguish after power up The POWER ON indicator b Inform unit should stay illuminated maintenance of the failure including the status of the BIT FAULT indicators noted above 8 23 11 5820 890 10 8 8 21 Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES PMCS VOLUME CONNECTORS Operator Procedure To control radio function press SEL until required function is highlighted CHAN COMSEC RF POWER MODE Then press the DOWN ARROW until specific item you need appeares in the display To turn backlight on press the light button To turn the light off press the light button a second time To change the level of audio volume rotate the volume control knob on the side of the HRCRD to reach desired level Check for proper installation Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cable Check for obvious da
205. ink send the ERF to RADIO D using one of the net IDs or SC frequencies RADIO D then sends the ERF to RADIO B using the second net ID or SC frequency NOTE RXMT MODE When ASIP radios are used at the RXMT site and are temporarily taken out of the RXMT mode the RXMT cable must be disconnected until the radios are placed back into a RXMT mode DATA RXMT AII data rates except PCKT may be retrans with the following provisions 1 SDM data TF and AD1 No change to normal retrans procedures Radios do not have to be set in Data mode data off Mixed radios at RXMT site or outstations is permitted 2 EDM DATA Radios at the RXMT site have to be set to the same EDM data rates as outstations Only SIP ASIP radios can be used at the RXMT site and outstations COMSEC SETTINGS FH TO FH PROCEDURE 4 30 If using SINCGARS versions RT 1523A B C D E either PT or CT COMSEC setting may be used as desired With a RT 1523 RXMT station FH SC only the RT in SC must be in PT These requirements in no way preclude the use of CT communications between RADIO A and RADIO B When the RXMT station must be in PT it will be necessary for RADIO A or RADIO B to change to PT if contact with the RXMT team is desired Procedures for establishing RXMT communications between RADIO A and RADIO B are as shown in Figure 4 20 below 1 NCS recognizes contact with RADIO B is lost or soon will be alerts RXMT crew for mission 2 RXMT crew loads
206. io NOTE FCTN positions LD SQ OFF e RXMT may also be used LD LDE RCU and EXT options appear in the display For ASIP EXT is not shown The SIP ASIP RT is now ready to perform as an RCU RT This enables the RCU RT operator to call the REM radio operator by wire Producing ring tone and CALL message at REM RT operators can now talk via orderwire not secure REM radio is now controlled by the RCU RT For use of a SIP RT as either a manpack RCU or a manpack remoted radio Battery Box CY 8523A B is required Battery Box CY 8523C cannot be used for manpack remote operations ASIP RT requires a two wire adapter The Control Receiver Transmitter RCU 11561 may continue to be used for remote control of a SINCGARS SIP radio when used for voice and SINCGARS data modes It cannot be used for enhanced data modes RCU RT COMSEC must be set to PT to talk on orderwire 5 62 11 5820 890 10 8 5 66 Send Data Via RS 232 Mode Special Operator Task 10 STEP ACTION RESULT Ensure computer has required SIP ASIP radio will except any program commercial communication program offering Xmodem a widely used file loaded transfer protocol Connect cable from computer to This data method does not require AUD DATA connector on the SIP ASIP SIP ASIP VAA functions RT By voice alert receiving station that data Also coordinate data rate to be used if
207. ith direction finding capabilities to accurately locate stations broadcasting in SC mode experience has shown that it is nearly impossible to determine the location of an FH station SINCGARS hopsets because of the rapidity of frequency hopping can include frequencies used by single channel nets and mobile subscriber equipment MSE The frequency manager at division corps or higher headquarters ensures best overall usage of frequencies when developing hopsets SINCGARS radios will communicate with VRC 12 Series radios and similar radios of our Allies in the SC mode Also the retransmission RXMT feature can be used as the interface between FH and SC nets when appropriate Loadsets containing TEKs and TSKs are good to use for 30 days ANCDs provide an additional 30 days of reserve data In short there is no requirement to update data for 30 days and then the unit has another 30 days to get their ANCDs reloaded with new data 11 5820 890 10 8 4 4 USE OF JULIAN DATE AND GPS ZULU TIME 4 4a Two Digit Julian Date DEFINITION TWO DIGIT DATE 1 JANUARY CHANGE CONVERSION APPENDIX IMPORTANCE Julian calendar days are normally numbered 1 through 365 or 366 with the year appended as a fourth digit The SINCGARS radio uses a special two digit form of Julian Date as a part of sync time The two digit Julian Date begins with 01 for 1 January and continues through to 00 repeating as necessary to cover the entire y
208. its and receives on any or all of the 2320 frequencies with 25 KHz separation in the 30 000 to 87 975 MHz range For best results 1200 or more of the total 2320 frequencies are normally used In the FH mode the SINCGARS radio uses hops on over 100 frequencies per second For two or more radios operating in the FH mode to communicate it is essential that they contain the same set of frequencies and other variables commonly referred to as Data 4 3b Frequency Hopping FH Data HOPSET TSK NET ID FH DATA COMMONALITY Frequencies made available for a SINCGARS radio to hop on are called Hopset A typical hopset consists of what remains of the total 2320 frequencies after protected frequencies such as commercial television are removed Protected frequencies are frequently referred to as Lockouts In any case except for technical purposes lockouts are treated as an integral part of the hopset The pattern in which the radio selects frequencies to hop on is pseudo random as determined by the transmission security key TSK Depending upon the number of frequencies available for hopping and the TSK itself the exact sequence of frequencies used during any one second will not be repeated for long periods of time The remaining variable required for two or more frequency hopping radios to communicate is called the Net ID It is a three digit number 000 999 which controls where in the pseudo r
209. iver Transmitter RT Controls by Technical x ERR RR REY RR C Remote Control Unit Controls d Automated Net Control Device ANCD Controls Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR Controls f Control Monitor C M 9 Loudspeaker 5 671 1 2 h Vehicular Intercommunications Set VIC PRIMARY OPERATOR PREPARATION TASKS a Definition of Primary Operator Preparation Tasks b Summary of Primary Operator Preparation Tasks C Select RT Preparation Settings from MENU Preparation TASK 1 d Load Single Channel Frequencies into RT Primary Operator Task 1 5 30 Load COMSEC FH Data Sync Time into RT Using ICOM Fill Primary Operator Task 2 5 32 Perform Hot Start Net Opening Primary Operator Task 3 5 34 g Perform Passive Late Net Entry Primary Operator Task 4 5 36 h Obtain SOI Information from ANCD Primary Operator Task 4 5 37 5 5 SPECIAL OPERATOR TASKS 5 42 a Definition of Special Operator Tasks 5 42 b Summary of Special Operator Tasks C Transfer COMSEC FH Data from ANCD to ANCD Sp
210. keys and FH data for all six radio channels each good for 30 days of operation plus 60 days of SOI information structured in five ten day editions containing two 5 day sets each When used for a single or special purpose an ANCD can store as many as 20 loadsets COMSEC and FH data and two or more division wide editions 10 days each The number of smaller unit SOI editions that can be stored in an ANCD depends entirely on the size of the SOI extract ANCD will also store as many as 120 COMSEC keys traffic encryption key TEK or key encryption key KEK or 280 transmission security keys TSKs BLACK AND WHITE VIDEO DISPLAY TWO LINES BY 24 CHARACTERS 85 KEYS FULL KEYPAD REMOVABLE CRYPTO IGNITION KEY CIK 6 PIN FILL PORT Figure 3 1 Automated Net Control Device ANCD AN CYZ 10 TRADE OFFS MEMO OTAR BROADCAST SECURE PHONE PLGR 3 1 b Characteristics HAND HELD CASE LID KEY PAD NIGHT VIEWING BACKUP MEMORY 3 1 Physical Data MEASUREMENTS POWER WEIGHT TM 11 5820 890 10 8 When an ANCD is used for special data storage purposes trade offs between the above COMSEC FH data and SOI capacities allow the ANCD storage capability to be tailored to specific unit requirements The ANCD has the ability to receive store and transfer up to four short memos each six lines in length with 22 characters per line Ov
211. l display Display shows XXX activate 3 Press STO Display shows STO _ 4 Enter X 1 6 Display shows STO X and blinks 5 53 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Make communications 1 Set CHAN to X 1 6 Channel in which ERF was stored check 2 Set FCTN to SQ N A 3 NCS or respond to Net update ERF is completed NCS call The NCS will direct which channel is to be used for storing the net update ERF If the update is effective immediately the will be stored in the operational channel If the update is to be made effective at a later time a channel other than the operational channel will be used for storage of the ERF update data tis assumed that the operator has the same COMSEC key loaded in all operational channels of the radio Otherwise the operator would have to scroll the proper to the new operational channel to have secure communications 5 54 11 5820 890 10 8 5 51 Perform CUE and Late Net Entry Special Operator Task 5 DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART SUBTASKS a Prepare radio to perform CUE and ERF method b CUE the NCS This task may be required when a radio has been out of the net for some period or has lost its sync time The preferred action is to try Passive Late Net Entry first See Primary Operator Task 4 This method requires the operator to load CUE and MAN frequencies cue the NCS in PT r
212. l situation prohibits transmitting Unless your mission is likely to require use of data mode do not need to perform this check 11 5820 890 10 8 8 20 PMCS for Control Monitor PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR SINCGARS CONTROL MONITOR Control Monitor C M C 11291 VRC Series Item to Operator Not Fully Mission Check Service Procedure Capable If CONTROLS RADIO Check for cracked FCTN or broken controls INIT Check for loose controls DIM Check for frozen controls Check for missing control knobs CABLES C M Cable CX 13290 Check for presence Check for proper installation of cable Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cable Before SELF TEST Perform C M self test Test should result in Before CONTROL OF Check control of RF PWR RT FUNCTIONS Check control of RT Mode Check control of Channel Check control of COMSEC The Control Monitor is not essential to the operation of the SINCGARS radio with which it is used Problems found with the Control Monitor during PMCS are corrected or reported to Unit Maintenance but they do not result in Not Fully Mission Capable determinations 11 5820 890 10 8 8 2 Vehicular Intercommunication Set WC AN WC 1 OPERATOR UNIT MAINTENANCE PMCS NMC STATUS Operator level preventive maintenance requirements and PMCS for the are c
213. language In that it is the NCS radio set to the FH M mode position that automatically keeps all of the net radios within the plus or minus 4 second window required for frequency hopping the NCS must transmit as often as necessary to maintain net sync time A general rule is for the NCS to transmit at least once every 24 hours in a very quiet net and about every half hour in a heavy traffic net 11 5820 890 10 8 CUE RESPONSE The NCS or an Alternate NCS is responsible for responding to calls A CUE caller is one who needs an ERF to get back into the secure FH net or one who has a VRC 12 type radio and must use the SC mode to communicate By not loading the CUE frequency net operators are spared the distraction of CUE messages appearing in their RT displays Also if the enemy is credited with direction finding capability the NCS station that responds to a CUE call using single channel mode should displace Immediately after completing the CUE response RXMT OPERATIONS It is the NCS who must anticipate the need for RXMT operations alert the RXMT crew in time for them to make preparations and move to the RXMT site and maintain RXMT communications with the distant station It is the NCS who will also make use of RXMT capabilities to communicate between a frequency hopping and single channel net ALTERNATE NCS The NCS has a full time job maintaining net discipline and controlling the net An important NCS requireme
214. lecting EXT disables the front panel controls of the RT EXT is used for GRM 122 testing LDE stands for local data entry and represents a future capability of the SIP ASIP RT to communicate with SIP ASIP VAA regarding data loads and requirements This feature is currently not used GPS 5 Represents a capability of the SINCGARS SIP ASIP radio SA 6 Represents a capability of the SINCGARS SIP ASIP radio CID 8 Represents a capability of the SINCGARS SIP ASIP radio CLR MENU MENU appears on SINCGARS ASIP when key is pressed Multiple presses will scroll MENU FREQ BACKLIGHT ASIP radio must be in SQ ON press key FREQ then CHG to change intensity 5 14 11 5820 890 10 8 Connectors SIP RT P1 System The P1 systems connector is located on the back of the SIP RT This connector provides RT power and signaling interfaces SYSTEMS CONNECTOR P1 ANTENNA CONNECTOR GPS CONNECTOR 5 AUD FILL CONNECTOR J3 AUD DATA CONNECTOR J4 Figure 5 12 SIP RT Connectors J5 GPS Located on the back of the SIP RT the GPS J5 connector provides an interface of the VAA GPS connector J4 AUD DATA The J4 AUD DATA connector supports general data communications at SINCGARS Data Rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 and 16 000 BPS and Enhanced Data Rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS The RS 232 interface allows transmission of data via SINCGARS SIP radios using computers and commercial software
215. lems can also be caused by operator error improperly set controls weak batteries loose connections or use of wrong data to cite a few reasons The Troubleshooting Guides which follow offer the operator systematic procedures for identifying and eliminating common faults helping the operator to maintain communications When there is an equipment failure or when your use of these Troubleshooting Guides fails to solve the problem contact your Unit Maintainer 11 5820 890 10 8 OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1 Loading RT With COMSEC FH Data From ANCD Fails STEPS CHECKS ACTIONS Perform ICOM Fill Again 1 Does ANCD indicate that YES Go to Step 2 data is being transferred NO Continue 2 Does RT indicate that data YES Problem is solved has been received NO Go to Step 2 Verify ANCD Data Storage Does ANCD contain a loadset YES Continue NO Load replace ANCD cont Ensure ANCD 5 Is low battery light on YES Replace cont Functional NO Replace ANCD cont 2 Does ICOM fill now load YES Problem is solved RT NO Go to Step 4 Ensure Fill Cable is 1 Is cable damaged cut or NO Continue Serviceable broken YES Replace cable cont 2 15 fill cable properly YES Continue connected to ANCD amp RT NO Reconnect cont 3 Does ICOM fill now load YES Problem is solved RT NO Go to Step 5 Re run SINCGARS Radio 1 Does RT pass all checks YES Continue PMCS and tests NO See Unit Maintenance 2 Do
216. les antennas handsets loudspeakers and any other components that are to be used CAUTION YOUR RT CAN BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER ATTACHMENT OF MANPACK ANTENNAS 1 To avoid damage turn the sleeve only not the antenna 2 Turning the antenna can destroy the antenna connector in the RT 11 5820 890 10 8 PMCS LOADING RT NET DISCIPLINE SYNC TIME In that NCS personnel are also operators they are required to perform Before Operation Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS as shown in Chapter 8 Performing PMCS involves checks of controls cables antennas power source self test keypad data loading and ability to communicate By performing PMCS NCS personnel are assured that all components of their radios are working properly or that something needs to be fixed by the NCS operator or unit maintenance The PMCS charts found in Cae aredi be followed exactly in the performance of PMCS No NCS operator action will pay greater dividends When they are satisfied with the results of Before Operation PMCS actions NCS personnel load their own radios with data and sync time in preparation for net opening The first three Primary Operator Tasks provide detailed procedures falls to the NCS to maintain net discipline This responsibility includes controlling access to the net maintaining an informal record of which stations are in the net and ensuring that messages are as brief as possible and use proper
217. lla s RADIO B OUTSTATION HILL 2 OR HIGHEST POINT 4 19 RETRANSMISSION SITUATION 4 960 RXMT Capability Modes FH NET TO FH NET FH NET TO SC NET SC NET TO SC NET DATA SOURCES ANTENNAS TM 11 5820 890 10 8 With extensive fielding of the SINCGARS radio FH net to FH net RXMT links will probably be the normal mode of operation RADIO A and RADIO C use the same FH data including net ID Communications between these two radios is no different than that between any two radios of the same net RADIO B which is normally a member of this net is out of range or has lost line of sight In the FH to FH RXMT operation RADIO B and RADIO D use a different net ID than that used by RADIO A and RADIO C Use of the same hopset and TSK poses no problem When the requesting station RADIO A calls the outstation RADIO B using one net ID the message passes through RADIO C and the RXMT cable to RADIO D which then sends the message to RADIO B using another net ID Other than a slight delay in transmission and the fact that distance and obstacles are overcome there is no difference between direct and RXMT communications It is anticipated that there will be both US and Allied Forces units equipped with SC only radios for some time When it is necessary for a FH net to make contact or maintain communications with a unit using an SC net RXMT can be useful regardless of distance or obstacles In the FH to SC RXMT operation R
218. location by direction finding There is no limit other than operational on the number of Alternate NCSs that may be employed The important point is that the use of Alternate NCSs is essential if the NCS is to meet all primary net responsibilities 4 47 11 5820 890 10 8 4 124 Special Task Performance OPERATOR There are nine Special Operator Tasks described in detail in Chapter 5 Most net operators do not need to be able to perform these tasks Some operators will be required to perform only certain special tasks for example retransmission operations Those operators who do need to perform one or more special tasks must be given extra training on an as required mission basis NCS amp ALT NCS There are five Special NCS Tasks described in detail in Chapter 6 These tasks involve the electronic transfer of COMSEC keys FH data and SOI information from NCS to NCS and from NCS to net operators Whether or not all NCS and Alternate NCS personnel need to be able to perform any or all of these special tasks is a matter of command policy based upon mission requirements If an NCS or Alternate is expected to perform any of these tasks special training must be provided 4 12e Operator Proficiency PRIMARY TASKS There are five primary tasks that all unit SINCGARS operators must be able to perform without assistance during unit mission operations They are described in detail in Chapter 5 POCKET GUIDE Each operator is provi
219. ly channels 1 3f Security Classification And Marking TB 380 41 5 The receiver transmitter RT of the SINCGARS ICOM ground radio the remote control unit RCU and the Automated Net Control Device ANCD are designated as Controlled Cryptographic Items Handle in accordance with TB 380 41 5 1 3 11 5820 890 10 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 11 5820 890 10 8 2 SINCGARS RADIOS AND COMPONENTS IN THIS CHAPTER SINCGARS Receiver Transmitters RT RT 1523 Series a RT Capabilities b Transmitter Characteristics c Receiver Characteristics d RT Model Differences Distinguishing Features TECHNICAL SIP ASIP Receiver Transmitter RT SIP ASIP RT Keypad SIP ASIP Connectors SIP RT Connectors ASIP RT RT Messages RT Physical Data Common Connections MANPACK RADIOS MPGeneral b Radio Components Radio Physical Data d MP Radio Performance Data BATTERY REQUIREMENTS Power Source Main Power Manpack Radio RCU RT Hold Up Battery VEHICULAR VEH RADIOS Short Range SR Radio Components AN VRC 87A D F Short Range Radio with Dismount SR D Components AN VRC 88A D F Long Range LR Radio Components AN VRC 90A D F Short Range Long Range Radio Components AN VRC 89A D F 2 23 Short Range Long Range Radio with Dismount Components AN VRC 91A D F Long Range Long Range Radio Components AN VRC 92A D F 2 2
220. mage to connectors Check for missing O rings Check for bent broken pins Not Fully Mission Capable If The POWER ON indicator does not illuminate and stay illuminated OR any of the four BIT FAULT indicators does not illuminate then extinguish after five seconds Before COMM CHECK During After Check for sidetone Check voice comm Cannot transmit or receive HRCRD is MISSION CAPABLE AS LONG AS TRASMIT AND RECEIVE FUNCTIONS ARE OPERABLE If controls are not functioning place radio function switch to normal operating position SO ON LD and change functions via keypads swithces 8 24 11 5820 890 10 8 8 3 BATTERY REQUIREMENTS 8 3a General POWER Manpack radios RCUs ANCDs and PLGRs all depend upon batteries SOURCE for their main power source Manpack and vehicular radios RCUs and PLGRs depend upon hold up batteries HUB for retention of stored data when main power is interrupted PURPOSE The objective of this paragraph is to offer users of SINCGARS radios and associated equipment general guides regarding the number of hours of a particular type usage each battery is expected to provide CAUTION It is important to understand that the times presented are the result of computations as well as experience Hours of service will vary depending upon how long the battery was in storage prior to use temperature when being used and other factors which cannot be clearly defined
221. ms you find while performing PMCS If unable to correct a problem identified by PMCS report it to your unit maintenance personnel Maintain a DA Form 2404 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet on your radio as required by your unit SOP or applicable Army Regulations regarding The Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS You do not need to record problems that you fix 81b PMCS Guidance ITEM NUMBER INTERVAL ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE NOT MISSION CAPABLE IF OPERATOR MANUAL TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The numerical sequence of those parts components or functions of your radio configuration that the PMCS direct be checked Cables is one example of a PMCS item This column indicates when each check is to be made For SINCGARS radio configurations only Before During and After Operations apply The parts components or functions of your radio that the PMCS table tells you to check Self Test is an example Items are shown in the order they are to be performed and may be referred to be Item Number Name as desired The Procedure column advises you of the checks to be made and steps to be taken These are to be performed in the order listed in the PMCS table The term Mission Capable means that your radio is on hand and ready to perform its combat mission as pertains to the item being checked Your radio is Not Mission Capable when fault shown in this column
222. munications requirements when the unit is in an operational situation These five primary tasks involve partial transfer of COMSEC FH data SOI information from one ANCD to another both Hot and Cold Start methods of net opening and responding to CUE calls All NCS personnel are expected to be able to perform these five primary tasks without assistance other than reference to the NCS Pocket Guide 11 5820 890 10 7 Operator Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS see are to be performed prior to performing operator or NCS tasks 6 3b Summary of Primary NCS Tasks PRIMARY TASK 1 PRIMARY TASK 2 PRIMARY TASK 3 PRIMARY TASK 4 PRIMARY TASK 5 Transfer Partial COMSEC FH Data ANCD to ANCD Used to download selected COMSEC keys or FH data elements from one ANCD to another This task supplements Special Operator Task 1 Transfer COMSEC FH Data From ANCD to ANCD which transfers complete data loads Transfer Selected SOI Information ANCD to ANCD Used when less than a complete SOI load is to be downloaded from one ANCD to another This task supplements Special Operator Task 2 Alternate Transfer Full SOI information From ANCD to ANCD which transfers the complete SOI file Conduct Hot Start Net Opening This is the principal method used for net openings operators load all required data and sync time and at the prescribed net opening time call the NCS and enter the secure FH net
223. n using the CUE feature POSITION CT This is the primary COMSEC setting for nets operating in the secure mode To Cipher Text make use of this setting RT must have been loaded with required COMSEC key or keys Use of the CT function essentially prevents the enemy from intercepting your communications TD This setting also provides for secure mode communications and is used when Time Delay needed to compensate for transmission delays Seek the help of a communications specialist if you think you need to use this feature of the SINCGARS radio This setting may be used in some forms of Over The Air Rekey OTAR Receive Variable transmissions but normal operator procedures do not require its use This position may be used to clear the RT of stored COMSEC keys by setting the switch to Z for 5 seconds Knob must be pulled out to enter or leave this position When turning the radio off by moving to OFF it is not necessary to use the COMSEC switch Z setting in order to clear COMSEC keys For RT 1523E 2 clears all data 5 9 11 5820 890 10 8 RT DISPLAY SIGNAL LOW HUB Message INFORMATION For the operator The RT display window located above the keypad provides the operator information regarding SIG HUB signal strength status of the HUB HI battery and a host of operational LO messages such as SC frequencies net ID numbers sync time and failure messages This
224. nal once the ERF loads sync time into the base clock load SC frequency in MAN channel load COMSEC key and FH data into RT Prepare radio to receive ERF FCTN to LD COMSEC to CT CHAN to MAN MODE to FH Standby for NCS to send ERF When is sent note sig display activate and display show HF XXX Press STO and channel number for storage Set FCTN to SQ ON Call NCS and enter the net or wait for NCS call When all operators have entered the net the Cold Start net opening is complete Figure 4 9 COLD START NET OPENING The Cold Start method of net opening is more demanding than the Hot Start procedure but it can be useful in situations where the NCS desires to bring all operators into the net at the exact same time 11 5820 890 10 8 4 6 LATE ENTRY 4 6a General DEFINITION METHODS PREFERENCE 4 6b Passive Method EASIEST BUILT IN CAPABILITY SITUATION PROCEDURE The term Late Net Entry means that the operator missed the announced net opening time and wishes to enter the net now the operator left the net for some reason and now wants to re enter or sync time in the operator radio now differs by more than 4 seconds from that of the net There are fours ways in which an operator can perform a late net entry each described below 1 Passive method of late net entry 2 The Hot Start option 3 Reloading sync time option and 4 The CUE and ERF meth
225. nal Stock Number 5820 01 267 9479 5820 01 420 6619 5820 01 451 8247 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5895 01 195 4844 5895 01 306 8093 5895 01 407 2627 5995 01 304 2026 5995 01 310 0355 5995 01 426 6728 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5340 01 392 0048 5340 01 456 7985 5820 01 267 9481 5820 01 420 6618 5820 01 451 8246 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5895 01 195 4844 5895 01 306 8093 5895 01 407 2627 9 Description CAGEC and Part Number RADIO SET AN VRC 89A LONG SHORT RANGE RADIO SET AN VRC 89D RADIO SET AN VRC 89F Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 AM 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 AM 7239C VRC 80063 A3245066 1 or AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3267335 Amplifier Radio Frequency PA AM 7238 VRC 80063 A3013357 1 AM 7238A VRC 80063 A3132135 1 AM 7238B VRC 80063 A3210919 1 Cable Assembly Radio Frequency W2 80063 A3013824 21 3 RT to PA Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 80063 A3103735 7 or 80063 A3255571 RT to VAA Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300
226. nce before passing f needed either carefully tie down the antenna or remove the antenna to make sure that you can safe y pass under the power line When mission permits use the short manpack antenna during operations on the move If you must use the long antenna on the move never pass under power lines if there is any doubt about overhear clearance f or additional safety information refer to T B 43 0129 Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment Figure 4 21 MANPACK LONG ANTENNA SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 11 5820 890 10 8 4 106 SINCGARS Low Profile Antenna SLPA AS 3916 SOURCE The SINCGARS Low Profile Antenna or SLPA for short is a part of selected vehicular radio installation kits Refer to SB 11 131 2 for listings of individual kits EMPLOYMENT The SLPA is designed to reduce antenna visibility and it withstands tree SAFETY limb strikes better than the regular antenna There is a slight reduction in operating range of the radio when the SLPA is employed Both regular and SLPA antennas are provided for selected combat vehicles tanks for example Safety precautions pertaining to the employment of vehicle antennas are repeated here for sake of emphasis WARNING DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR IF THE ANTENNA COMES INTO CONTACT WITH OVERHEAD POWER LINES Do not stop your vehicle under power lines When mobile never pass under power lines if there is any doubt about overhead clearance
227. ne circuits are available It is anticipated that STU transfer of SINCGARS related key and data will be especially useful during mobilization as well as peacetine management of widely dispersed Reserve Component forces Secure telephone units require use of proper COMSEC key Synchronous data modes are at 2400 4800 and 9600 BPS Interoperable Cryptographic Ignition Key CIK allows the use of seven terminals STU is compatible with US commercial DDN international telephone systems STU meets requirements of NACSIM 5100A and is in compliance with MIL STD 461B RS03 The STU is a commercial off the shelf item and is not designed for outdoor all weather use 3 4c STU Physical Data MEASUREMENTS POWER BACK UP POWER WEIGHT TEMPERATURE TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Height is 6 4 CM 2 5 IN Width is 22 9 CM 9 0 IN Depth is 25 4 CM 10 0 IN Uses 115 or 230 Vac 50 60 Hz at 20 W nominal consumption Uses a lithium industry standard BR2325 battery to prevent loss of fill from power outage 3 6 KG 8 0 LB Operating temperature ranges 0 to 70 32 to 122 11 5820 890 10 8 3 5 VEHICULAR INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SET WC AN VIC 1 3 5a VIC Components CONTROL CONTROL AMPLIFIER INTERCOMMUNICATION INTERCOMMUNICATION AUDIO FREQUENCY SET C 2298 VRC SET C 2297 VRC AM 1780 VRC INDICATOR LIGHT BINDING POST AUDIO BINDING POST LANDLINES 1 Audio Frequency Amplifier
228. net using the RS 232 enhanced data feature All unit NCS personnel should be able to perform these special as well as primary operator tasks Training in special operator tasks is an inherent part of unit sustainment training and is conducted on a small group or Individual basis related to unit mission requirements 11 5820 890 10 8 5 56 Summary of Special Operator Tasks SPECIAL TASK 1 SPECIAL TASK 2 SPECIAL TASK 3 SPECIAL TASK 4 SPECIAL TASK 5 SPECIAL TASK 6 Transfer COMSEC FH Data Sync Time ANCD to ANCD This task is used when individual operators are required to load their own ANCD with COMSEC keys FH data and sync time from one being passed around the unit Many unit SOPs call for communications specialists or designated NCOs to perform this task for operators This task is performed prior to net openings and during periodic ANCD data updates Transfer QREF SOI Information ANCD to ANCD This task is similar to Special Task 1 but differs in the procedure followed It is performed prior to net openings and during periodic ANCD data updates Unit SOP determines whether operators communications specialists or designated NCOs are responsible for the function Perform Cold Start Net Opening If an NCS finds it necessary to use the Cold Start method of net opening it is essential that operators be trained in this task This task is special in that it is unlikely the Cold Start net opening proced
229. ngeover from one set of data to another demands net discipline Changeover must take place at the time prescribed and the new data being introduced must be the correct data for that time Net discipline is especially critical to the maintenance of exact sync time Nets are opened using precise GPS time and NCS transmissions pull the operating sync time of net member radios to that of the NCS radio Also the SINCGARS radio offers the operator the means for reading the sync time in the radio The ANCD and PLGR offer the means for reloading sync time into the radio But when SINCGARS operators misuse their TIME control they can be effectively taken out of the FH net An important aspect of operator net discipline is to leave the TIME control alone unless there is a specific need to make a change Most net operators require a CUE frequency only when they need to perform a CUE and ERF method of late net entry If a CUE frequency is loaded routinely that operator will see a CUE message in the radio display every time any station sends a CUE signal Only the NCS and alternate NCSs should routinely load a CUE frequency Net operators can obtain the required CUE frequency from their ANCD when one is needed 4 12b Role of the NCS DATA NET OPENING NET STATUS SYNC TIME CUE CALLS ACCESS CONTROL USE OF RXMT HELP ADMIN TRAFFIC ALT NCS TM 11 5820 890 10 8 It is the NCS who is responsible for SINCGARS net discipline NCS
230. nics Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use A 6 MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS A 2 735 244 2 25 30 738 750 SB 11 624 Reporting of Item and Packaging Discrepancies Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms The Army Maintenance Management System Warning Notice for Vehicles in Which Radios are Mounted 11 5820 890 10 8 JULIAN DATE CALENDAR REGULAR YEAR DAY MO JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC 1 01 32 60 91 21 52 82 13 44 74 05 35 2 02 33 61 92 22 53 83 14 45 75 06 36 3 03 34 62 93 23 54 84 15 46 76 07 37 4 04 35 63 94 24 55 85 16 47 77 08 38 5 05 36 64 95 25 56 86 17 48 78 09 39 6 06 37 65 96 26 57 87 18 49 79 10 40 7 07 38 66 97 27 58 88 19 50 80 11 41 8 08 39 67 98 28 59 89 20 51 81 12 42 9 09 40 68 99 29 60 90 21 52 82 13 43 10 10 41 69 00 30 61 91 22 53 83 14 44 11 11 42 70 01 31 62 92 23 54 84 15 45 12 12 43 71 02 32 63 93 24 55 85 16 46 13 13 44 72 03 33 64 94 25 56 86 17 47 14 14 45 73 04 34 65 95 26 57 87 18 48 15 15 46 74 05 35 66 96 27 58 88 19 49 16 16 47 75 06 36 67 97 28 59 89 20 50 17 17 48 76 07 37 68 98 29 60 90 21 51 18 18 49 77 08 38 69 99 30 61 91 22 52 19 19 50 78 09 39 70 00 31 62 92 23 53 20 20 51 79 10 40 71 01 32 63 93 24 54 21 21 52 80 11 41 72 02 33 64 94 25 55 22 22 53 81 12 42 73 03 34 65 95 26 56 33 23 54 82 13 43 74 04 35 66 96 27 57 24 24 55 83 14 44 75 05 36 67 97 28 58 25 25 56 84 15 45 76 06 37 68 98 29 59 26 26 57 85 16 46 77 07 38 69
231. nnected to a SINCGARS radio by two wire linkage typically WD 1 field wire The RCU may be located up to 4 kilometers away from the radio being remotely controlled CAPABILITIES The RCU sends to and receives from its companion SINCGARS radio voice and data messages in either single channel or frequency hopping mode and in plain or cipher text INTERCOM A voice intercom capability is provided between the RCU and radio operators RANGE Operating ranges of SINCGARS radios that are remotely controlled by an RCU are the same as the bracketed ranges shown for various radio configurations in paragraphs 2 34 and 2 51 2 36 11 5820 890 10 8 2 8 CONTROL MONITOR 11291 2 8a Components 1 UN ec FHiM Ore M LO n FRONT PANEL C 11291A VRC S B Control Monitor C 11291 2 Cable CX 13290 connects C M to VAA Figure 2 22 Components of Control Monitor C 11291 2 37 11 5820 890 10 8 2 8b Physical Data NOTE Weights are in kilograms measurements are in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches All weights are approximate all measurements are maximums Table 2 13 Control Monitor Physical Data ITEM LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT WEIGHT Control Monitor 11 8 15 1 29 11291 4 6 5 9 Cable s CX 13290 2 9 15 22 feet in length 2 8c Performance Data
232. nt Pressing this button at the proper time during data transfers causes the data to enter the target ANCD Pressing this button at the proper time during data transfers causes data to be sent from the source to the target ANCD This button is used to cause program being used to return to the preceding display This is a simple on off control by which the ANCD may be readily activated and deactivated This key is used for scrolling and in some cases is required in lieu of up and down arrows This key is not used Low battery light comes on automatically when batteries become weak Not used routinely when prompted to do so press this key to acknowledge receipt of message or confirm successful operation This button may be used to delete individual characters when data is being manually entered into the ANCD Also used to delete SOI sets This key is used for scrolling and in some cases is required in lieu of up and down arrows This key is used to enter a space and may be used to erase characters during data entry When this key is activated the word LETTER appears near the bottom left of the display and letters may be entered To use numbers and bottom level items press LOCK LTR again word LETTER disappears from the ANCD display Use this key to select item enter data and to continue to the next step in an operator procedure 11 5820 890 10 8 Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver
233. nt is to make proper use of Alternate NCS stations for critical functions such as responding to CUE calls entering late members into the net and continuing to use old data until all net members have changed over to updated data UPDATES For periodic updates the NCS assists the unit Signal Officer in the task of getting some ANCDs reloaded and new data manually distributed to net operators On those special occasions when it is impossible or impractical to physically disseminate new data it falls to the NCS to transmit TEKs FH data or SOI information by electronic transfer means Depending upon the state of training and extent of experience it may be necessary for the unit Signal Officer and communications specialists to assist NCSs in the use of electronic transfer procedures SUMMARY OF TRANSFER METHODS TYPE OF DATA MODE OF SYNC LOCK HOP DISTRIBUTION ERF BROADCAST OTAR Figure 7 1 Summary of Transfer Methods Although the KEK in receiving radios is automatically updated during an AK OTAR transfer a KEK cannot be electronically transferred from one location to another 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3 PRIMARY NCS TASKS 6 3a Definition of Primary NCS Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED There are five tasks categorized as primary for SINCGARS NCS personnel These five tasks along with both Primary and Special Operator Tasks enable a SINCGARS NCS to meet all normal com
234. o the front of the ASIP VAA J1 Antenna RF Input Output 5 16 POSITION OFF Zero STBY Stand By TST Test LD Load SQ ON Squelch On SQ OFF Squelch Off REM Remote RXMT Retransmit 11 5820 890 10 8 ez E Figure 5 14 ASIP RT FUNCTION SWITCH FUNCTION CONTROL POSITIONS AND USES PURPOSE All power is shut off all stored data COMSEC FH sync time and manpack battery life indicator are deleted after 5 seconds radio is completely inoperable position is used when radio is not in use and for storage Clears COMSEC after 5 seconds clears all FH data operator pauses in this position for 5 seconds when setting FCTN switch to OFF Makes radio inoperative but all stored data is retained sync time is lost after 200 hours setting FCTN to SQ ON returns radio to fully operational status In STBY power is drawn from main source This position causes self test of RT data and ECCM circuits test results are shown in RT display Running RT self test is a routine step in start up procedure The load position is required for loading SC frequencies FH data and COMSEC keys required also to receive an ERE This is the normal operating position of the radio for FH mode For SC mode this position reduces noise This position is not used for the FH mode In the SC mode SQ OFF helps to bring distant stations to work through jamming and to be compatible with ra
235. od All four methods are effective The one to use is the one which best fits your situation When your situation will permit use of the Passive method it is the easiest to use requires minimum action on the part of the operator The SINCGARS radio has a built in capability to bring itself back into the 4 second window The typical situation where the Passive method is most useful is when the radio remains fully loaded with data but sync time has for whatever reason drifted out of the 4 second window It must still be within one minute of net sync time An indicator of the above situation is that no traffic is heard on the net for some period The operator merely presses FREQ on the keypad and then SYNC The RT display shows LF The operator then waits for traffic to be heard on the net at which time the display drops the L and reads a normal XXX At this point time has been electronically brought back into sync and the operator is back in the net See Primary Operator Task 4 for details 11 5820 890 10 8 1 Note lack of traffic net 2 Press FREQ on RT keypad display reads F XXX 3 Press SYNC on RT keypad display read LF XXX 4 Wait to hear traffic on net DO NOT Note that L disappears from RT display 5 Your radio has brought you back into sync time you are back in the the net Figure 4 10 PASSIVE LATE NET ENTRY If you PTT wh
236. of three things 1 You have an ANCD or other fill device connected to the RT Disconnecting the fill device will correct the FAIL 5 situation 2 You have mistakenly set the COMSEC switch to Z Moving the COMSEC switch to another position will correct the FAIL 5 situation 3 The RT tamper switch has been activatedor there is a hard COMSEC failure in which case you need to see your unit maintainer This message applies to INC and failures When GPS time has been successfully loaded into the SIP ASIP radio the letter G will be displayed When a radio loaded GPS time is returned to SQ ON from STBY a blinking G indicates that GPS time needs to be reloaded Disappearance of the indicates that the radio is no longer using GPS time Indicates that the SIP ASIP radio has experienced a COMSEC failure operator must change to PT in order to continue to communicate When this message appears it indicates a COMSEC problem The radio will not transmit receive or fill until BIT has successfully run If you cannot get the RT to run BIT successfully action by unit maintenance is needed This message appears when attempting to load GPS time without a GPS device PLGR attached If you power up your radio in CT when there are no COMSEC keys loaded a NOKEY message will be displayed and a COMSEC alarm will be heard Setting COMSEC to PT or loading a COMSEC key will clear the alarm This message will be
237. oper y d Damaged and cannot be used means that after visual inspection or operational check you determine that a piece of equipment for whatever reason is faulty and will not support your mission requirements or presents a safety hazard ii Use of the ICOM fill procedure is appropriate here but separate checks of COMSEC keys FH data and sync time elements are required Operators having special requirements NCSs for example should check those functions that are important to mission operations ERF for example Skip this step if unit SOP or the tactical situation prohibits transmitting ma Unless your mission is likely to require use of data mode or retransmission operations you do not need to perform these two checks 11 5820 890 10 8 814 Operator Troubleshooting Guides RELIABILITY PROBLEMS CAUSES TS GUIDES UNIT MAINTENANCE While the reliability of the SINCGARS radio has been thoroughly proven in tests and troop unit experience an operator can expect to encounter some problems especially when the radio and associated equipment are used together for various reasons Four problems are experienced most often They are Loading RT with COMSEC and FH data from ANCD fails e Operator is unable to contact the net NCS Operator hears no traffic on the net Radio presents strange message noise that will not clear Any of these problems may be caused by an equipment failure But these prob
238. ored in ANCD press ENTR to select QREF Y N 7 Respond NO Do you want to specify groups to send Y N 8 Respond YES Scroll 1 4 amp press ENTR to select groups 9 Press 1 1 to display and 1 group selected press ENTR to select keep selecting Y N 10 Enter YES to continue Do you want to specify a time enter NO to quit pd to send Y N 6 21 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS 11 Respond YES Enter Time Pd gt 12 Enter Time Period and Include Suffix amp Smoke Pyro press ENTR data Y N 13 Respond YES to include Send to respond NO to exclude Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 14 Enter BROADCAST Enter ID for each polled ANCD and 0 when done 1 15 Press down arrow Polled 1234567890123456 gt 16 Enter IDs for polling see Polled 12 456 901 34 6 example press ENTR gt 17 Enter 0 to quit Do you want to save this SOI set Y N 18 Respond YES to save SOI New SOI set name data gt 222222227 19 Enter SOI set name and Connect ANCD to RT press ENTR AUD DATA 20 Press down arrow Press SEND to send WAIT c Prepare net operators 1 Say Standby for Broadcast Alerts net members to an for receipt of SOI follow my instructions ACK Immediate requirement Broadcast 2 After ACK say Go to SQ Ensures net radios and ANCDs ON FH CT DATA 1200 are properly prepared 3 Say Turn ANCD ON select Soi Radio supervisor 4 Say Enter SOI qRef Group Net suf
239. ot be placed in this position except as directed in the 20 and 30 maintenance manuals 11 5820 890 10 8 gt 19 7 zi Hee AMPLIFIER anaes FOR LR LR 8 x Y DASHED CABLES 5 USED ONLY FOR LR LR in DC POSITION A POSITION B Figure 3 5 Dual Long Long Range LR LR two AN VW 92s with Multiplexer 11 5820 890 10 8 3 4 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU 3 4 STU Capabilities PURPOSE ANCILLARY DEVICES APPLICATIONS DATA RECEIPT AVAILABILITY 3 4b STU Characteristics COMSEC DATA RATES CIK COMPATIBILITY TEMPEST COMMERCIAL To enable secure up to and including SECRET level of classification voice and data transmissions to be performed over commercial and military telephone circuits The ANCD may be connected to the STU to serve as the source of data and information to be transferred via telephone COMSEC key FH data hopset lockout TSK net ID and SOI information may be sent over commercial and military telephone circuits distance unlimited At the receiving end of the STU transfer operation data is received by and stored in a target ANCD available for use when required STU equipment is provided primarily for peacetime non battlefield use but it can be used whenever commercial or military telepho
240. ource of highly accurate GPS time By opening all nets on GPS time and updating NCS RT sync time to GPS time daily all nets of a division corps or larger force are continuously kept within the 4 second window required for FH communications When common sync time is maintained there is no need to enter or monitor another net to remain within that net s sync time Any net you need to enter whether a part of your loadset or not is readily available without concern for sync time Operational differences in terms of sync time are shown in Figure 4 4 below 1 minute up to 100 days 1 minute up to 100 days Figure 4 4 SYNC TIME OPERATIONAL DIFFERENCES 434 Advantages INTERCEPTION JAMMING LOCATING FREQUENCY SHARING COMPATIBILITY UPDATE PERIODS TM 11 5820 890 10 8 In addition to the built in COMSEC capability of the SINCGARS radio it confronts an enemy attempting to monitor friendly traffic with the rapid change of frequencies over a wide range To intercept friendly traffic an enemy must be able to match the FH data and sync time of the friendly net Jamming a SINCGARS FH net can be done but only with extraordinary effort and commitment of equipment on the part of the enemy Tests have shown that even when 30 of the FH channels have been jammed a significant achievement voice messages are still quite understandable Although it is relatively easy for an enemy w
241. overed in Chapter 3 TM 11 5830 340 12 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual Intercommunication Set AN VIC 1 Unit level preventive maintenance requirements and PMCS for the VIC are covered Chapter 5 11 5830 340 12 Organizational Maintenance Manual Intercommunication Set AN VIC 1 Unit level maintenance procedures for the VIC are also addressed Unit Maintenance Manual SINCGARS Ground ICOM Radio Sets Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for the VIC system are shown below for the convenience of the SINCGARS operator using a VIC intercomm For answers to technical questions concerning the VIC system see the VIC manual cited above TM 11 5830 340 12 Radios in VIC 1 equipped vehicles can be operated directly by passing the VIC system if necessary Intercom however is essential for the safe and effective operation of the combat vehicle Thus intercom is a Not Fully Mission Capable deficiency 11 5820 890 10 8 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR SINCGARS RADIOS USED WITH INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SET AN VIC 1 Item to Operator Not Fully Mission Check Service Procedure Capable If Before CONTROLS During MAIN PWR Check for cracked After POWER ON OFF or broken controls INT ACCENT Check for loose controls RADIO TRANS Check for frozen controls MONITOR SWITCHES Check for missing control knobs Before CABLES During Check for missing cables After
242. pecific procedures and messages are found in the operator and NCS tasks covered in Chapters 5 and 6 Figure 5 10 KEYPAD When entering data into the radio through the RT keypad keep in mind that the display will go blank about 7 seconds after your latest entry For example if you load 4 numbers of a SC frequency and then pause for more than 7 seconds the display will go blank and you will have to start over If you need to pause during data entry continue to hold down the last button used The display will remain active as long as you press a key 5 11 11 5820 890 10 8 KEYPAD BUTTONS AND USES KEYPAD BUTTON PURPOSE 1 THRU 0 These keys enable the operator to enter numbers Most frequent use is for entry of SC frequencies They are also used for loading sync time via the RT keypad and for changing net IDs CMSC Press this key to determine the COMSEC key position being used RT display COMSEC will show TEK 1 thru 5 or KEK Channel 6 Ignore this key unless specifically directed by your SigO or NCS to use it Star It serves no purpose during normal operation of SINCGARS radios This is present on some models and not on others SYNC Press this key to activate the passive late net entry feature of the SINCGARS radio FREQ This key is used to check load clear and offset SC frequencies and to check Frequency and change net IDs DATA Press this key to determine data status which can
243. perator usage rate is defined as 9 minutes of receiving monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting on average NCS usage rate is defined as 2 minutes of receiving monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting on average 8 3c Manpack Radio RCU Hold Up Battery HUB HUB Hold up battery used is Battery Non Rechargeable BA 5372 U BATTERY MANPACK RADIO RCU HUB BATTERY BA 5372 Approximate Length of Expected Service TYPE OF USE RT 1523 Series RT 1523 Series RCU 6 CAUTION SINCGARS HUB and ANCD batteries look similar and can be physically interchanged The HUB battery is 6 5 Volts while ANCD batteries are 3 Volts each If HUB batteries 3 of them are mistakenly placed in the ANCD it will be destroyed Placing one ANCD battery in the RT HUB position will cause the RT to lose its fill of data Therefore be sure you know which battery goes where Always read the label before installing either HUB or ANCD batteries 8 26 11 5820 890 10 8 8 3d Automated Net Control Device ANCD Power ANCD MAIN POWER Batteries used are 3 Duracel 3 Volt BA 5123 U BATTERY LIFE ANCD MAIN POWER Requires 3 Batteries BA 5123 Approximate Length of Expected Service TYPE OF USE ANCD NORMAL primarily SOI references HEAVY NCS frequent data transfers EE LOADED in OFF position Use of Alkaline batteries in the ANCD may cause
244. ping radios In addition to the multiplexing function the FHMUX prevents frequency collisions and provides the selectivity necessary to attenuate any local interfering signal which might otherwise result in degrading the receiver sensitivity The is digitally tuned via the SNAP interface when controlled by a SINCGARS radio 3 3a FHMUX COMPONENTS Multiplexer TD 1456 VRC FHMUX Mounting Base Figure 3 2 Multiplexer TD 145 VRC and Mounting Base 3 3b FHMUX Physical Data NOTE Weights are in kilograms measurements are in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches All weights are approximate all measurements are maximums Multiplexer 43 2 17 0 40 6 16 0 21 6 8 5 25 56 Multiplexer mounting base 40 6 16 0 41 4 16 3 8 9 3 5 8 6 19 11 5820 890 10 8 3 3 Performance Data Vehicular Configuration shows a typical vehicular configuration using one multiplexer and two VRC 92A radios The introduction of the multiplexer into the radio system is transparent that is it does not affect the way the radios are operated The number of vehicular antennas needed is reduced from four to one Instead of each radio going directly to its own antenna the antenna connections of the four radios are routed to the multiplexer and the multiplexer then connects to a single common antenna To provide frequency hopping information to the multiplexer the SNAP
245. provement let us know Send us an EIR You the user are the only one who can tell us what you don t like about your equipment Let us know why you don t like the design or performance Put it on an SF 368 Product Quality Deficiency Report if you can obtain this form Otherwise use regular paper for your report Our interest is in what you have to tell us and you will receive a reply Mail your report to COMMANDER U S ARMY CECOM ATTN AMSEL ED PH FORT MONMOUTH NJ 07703 5007 1 3d Reporting Errors And Recommending Improvements DA Form 2028 You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures please let us know Mail your letter DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms or DA Form 2028 2 located in the back of this manual directly to COMMANDER U S ARMY CECOM ATTN AMSEL LC LEO D SFO FORT MONMOUTH NJ 07703 5007 or electronically at www monmouth army mil cecom Irc pubs 2028 html fill out the Online 2028 form and submit it for a faster response 1 3e Hand Receipt HR Manuals TM 10 HR This manual has a companion document with a TM number followed by HR Hand Receipt TM 11 5820 890 10 HR consists of preprinted hand receipts DA Form 2062 that list end item related equipment i e COEI and AAL you must account for As an aid to property accountability additional HR manuals may be requisitioned from supp
246. r DO NOT store lithium batteries with other hazardous materials and keep them away from open flame or heat 11 5820 890 10 8 MANPACK LONG ANTENNA SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR IF THE ANTENNA COMES INTO CONTACT WITH OVERHEAD POWER LINES Never fully extend the long antenna directly under power lines If you must fully extend the long antenna near power lines power line poles or towers or buildings with overhead power line connections never come closer than two times the antenna height from the base of the power line pole tower or building Stop before you get close to the power line and check for clearance before passing If needed either carefully tie down the antenna or remove the antenna to make sure that you can safety pass under the power line When mission permits use the short manpack antenna during operations on the move If you must use the long antenna on the move never pass under power lines if there is any doubt about overhead clearance For additional safety information refer to 43 0129 Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment VEHICULAR ANTENNA SAFTEY PRECAUTIONS WARNING DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR IF THE ANTENNA COMES INTO CONTACT WITH OVERHEAD POWER LINES Do not stop your vehicle under power lines When mobile never pass under power lines if there is any doubt about overhead clearance If you are not sure that an antenna on
247. r The MK manual key procedure moves TEK from a Source ANCD through the Source NCS RT through the Target NCS RT into the Target NCS s ANCD Send TEK to Net Operators Using the AK Method of OTAR This is a method for disseminating a new TEK by electronic transfer with a net The procedure moves the new TEK from the NCS s ANCD through the NCS s radio directly into the radios of net operators Receive and Store TEK Sent by MK Method of OTAR This is the procedure followed by Target NCSs when a Source NCS sends a TEK by MK OTAR Special NCS Task 3 above This task enables the receiving NCSs to store the electronically transmitted TEK in an ANCD where it 1 readily available for further distribution within the unit when required 11 5820 890 10 8 6 4c Transmit Updated Data Via Net Update Special NCS Task 1 DESCRIPTION This task enables the NCS to electronically transmit new FH data to net operators when distribution by physical connection of ANCD to ANCD is impossible or impractical This procedure may be used to update change hopsets TSKs net IDS and sync time The task involves alerting net operators sending the ERF using the net operational channel confirming receive of the ERF and making a communications check when the changed FH data is put into effect DETAILED FLOWCHART TRANSMIT UPDATED FH DATA VIA NET UPDATE ERF SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare to send net 1 Obtain upd
248. r meanings as desired by pressing up down arrows 5 39 11 5820 890 10 8 TIME PERIOD Enter Tmpd and scroll to the SOI item desired Tmpd qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Enter Time Pd gt 1 Enter Set and scroll to the SOI item desired Set qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo select Choose Send Receive Scroll press ENTR to select SOI set Set name nr Edn name TP nr A SETmay be deleted by entering Set and pressing the ANCD DELE delete key 9 SIGN COUNTERSIGN Enter C s to view sign countersign for current time period To view sign countersign for other time periods go to Tmpd and enter time period desired C s qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo TO1 Sign HARDWOOD Cntrsign SNEAKER 5 40 h FIND MEMO TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Enter Find then select the category of SOI item desired If the first item viewed is not the desired one press J for JUMP to cause the ANCD to continue to search for the SOI item you want to see Find qRef Group Net sufx Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Find Net nEtid Sfx Word Clsgn Grp gRp Des Frq Enter Memo and select the memo number desired Each of four memos may be six lines long with 22 spaces on each line Memos are available in QREF files as well as full SOI files They may be transferred from ANCD to ANCD in both full and QREF transfers Yo
249. r original position 5 67 11 5820 890 10 8 5 74 Scanning Capability DEFINITION TO START SCANNING TO TRANSMIT TO CHECK FREQUENCY TO CANCEL CHANNEL TO RESTORE CHANNEL TO STOP SCANNING 5 68 The SINCGARS radio has the ability to scan up to eight single channel frequencies CUE MAN and CHAN 1 6 When a signal is found the RT will lock in on that channel and the RT display show the number of that channel As an operator you can both receive and transmit on the locked channel When the channel has been inactive for 2 5 seconds the RT will automatically resume scanning To start scanning follow this procedure e Set CHAN to CUE to SQ ON MODE to FH COMSEC to CT or PT as desired Press STO RT display will show SCAN _ e Enter the number 8 to scan all channels at the same priority Enter the number 0 thru 7 to establish priority for that channel The priority channel will be scanned more often than other channels RT display will show the number you entered and scanning will begin e To resume scanning while a channel is locked in press FREQ To transmit on a locked in channel press PTT within 2 5 seconds after net clears or scanning will automatically resume To select a channel to transmit on use RT keypad to enter desired channel number and channel selected will appear in the RT display Press PTT within 2 5 seconds of channel number appearing in display To tran
250. ra TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RESULTS select Soi Radio sUpervisor Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time Julian Day X X RT display shows D D RT display show RT displays shows XX New Julian Date IS now stored in the radio ANCD Time running HH MM SS eg 22 45 15 RT display shows HH MM RT display shows RT display shows RT display shows HH press STO yet Do NOT Press STO on RT keypad 7 Compare RT time with ANCD time When ANCD and time are at same MM zero seconds Manual loading of JD and sync time is completed Time stored in the radio should be within one second of that in the ANCD if not repeat time loading procedure Press TIME three times 5 35 11 5820 890 10 8 5 44 Pet form Passive Late Net Entry Primary Operator Task 4 DESCRIPTION This task is required when the sync time in your radio becomes more than 4 seconds plus or minus but less than one minute different from net sync time Passive late net entry enables an individual operator to re enter the net without action on the part of the NCS or other net operators This task makes use of a feature built into the SINCGARS radio and involves but two steps placing the RT in passive late net entry mode and waiting for the radio to adjust its sync time to that of the net When this method of late net entry does not work the Hot Start procedure or CUE and
251. radio automatically maintains sync time control 4 seconds for that one net With a separate clock for each FH operating channel sync time is automatically maintained for your operational channel and the other four or five nets you have loaded into your radio Commanders aircraft crews and others who cross unit boundaries frequently have the need to be able to enter any net quickly and with minimum time and effort If the net required is loaded in a channel of one of the operating radios only the channel switch needs to be changed If the net required is not loaded in one of the operating radios and if all nets use common COMSEC FH data and sync time only the net ID needs to be changed for secure FH communications to begin Monitoring or eavesdropping as it is some times called across all unit nets is essential to command and control on the modern battlefield SINCGARS provides the capability to monitor or enter any net in the division so long as common COMSEC key FH data Julian Date and GPS Zulu time are properly used 4 5 NCS ROLE NET OPERATION MINIMUM RT REQUIREMENTS 4 5b Loadsets DEFINITION UNIT SPECIFIC TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The NCS of each net is responsible for opening the net at the time required to support unit operations NCS net opening responsibilities include e Announcing the date time of opening Ensuring operators provided the required COMSEC ke
252. rated as far possible 4 11 REMOTING CAPABILITIES Aila Use of RCU GENERAL SOURCE COMSEC FH DATA 4 34 The Control Receiver Transmitter C 11561 or remote control unit RCU as it is commonly called provides for remote control of SINCGARS radios for ranges up to 4 KM The RCU is connected with the radio by two way field wire and its controls features and operation are quite similar to those of the SINCGARS radio SIP ASIP RT can be used as a RCU LS 685 cannot be used with SIP ASIP RT The RCU is a separate issue item similar to a SINCGARS radio configuration RCU details and components battery box handset and LS 685 loudspeaker may be found 2 to this manual Both the and RT use a COMSEC key to provide cipher text capability TEK can be loaded into the RCU from an ANCD using the standard ICOM fill procedure by selecting RCU rather than ICOM from the appropriate ANCD menu The RCU does not require FH data When the net is operating in the FH mode FH data in the RT enables frequency hopping capabilities 11 5820 890 10 8 FRONT PANEL controls are as shown Figure 4 23 below They differ from the RT only in the following ways front panel contains a speaker connector and control for LS 685 but has no antenna or RXMT connector e For the RCU control the RT REM position is replaced with ICM meaning intercom RF PWR RCV
253. read 600 1200 2400 16000 AD1 Analog Data 1 TF TACFIRE or OFF ERF NCS operators press this key when sending a Cold Start or net update ERF to Electronic Remote Fill net operators It is not used by operators on same key as OFST OFST Used in conjunction with the FREQ and CHG buttons this key enables the Offset operator to offset SC frequencies by plus or minus 5 or 10 KHz The offset on same key as ERF feature of the SINCGARS radio can be used only in the SC mode CHG When used in conjunction with the DATA OFST or CMSC keys this button Change causes the display to scroll through available data or options LOUT This key is used only by NCS personnel and is rarely needed with current Lock Out operating procedures Operators may ignore this key TIME Press TIME once to see the Julian Date press it a second time to see sync time hours and minutes press a third time to see sync time in running minutes and seconds Used in conjunction with the CLR and STO keys the TIME button allows entry of sync time via the RT keypad CLR Used in conjunction with other keys the CLR button enables the operator to Clear delete entries or stored data LOAD Used to load data into holding memory and to retrieve data from permanent memory Also used to load radio STO Press the STO key to place data into permanent memory of the RT Use of the Store STO key is the last step in various operator procedures KE
254. rect GPS Sync Are ANCD and RT times YES Continue Time is Used within 2 seconds NO Use passive LNE cont 2 Can NCS now be YES Problem is solved contacted NO Go to Step 5 Re run SINCGARS Radio 1 Does RT pass all checks YES Continue PMCS and tests NO See Unit Maintenance 2 NCS now be YES Problem is solved contacted NO See Unit Maintenance If other traffic can be heard on the net problem is assumed to rest with the NCS station ANCD time may not be valid if it has been more than 24 hours since ICOM fill of radio Passive late net entry LNE 11 5820 890 10 8 OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 3 Operator Hears No Traffic on the Net Perform Passive Late Net Does RT display show LF YES Wait for traffic on net cont Entry LNE NO Adjust DIM switch cont Is traffic heard and L YES Problem is solved dropped from RT display NO Go to Step 2 Check VOL Control 1 Is VOL set high enough to YES Go to Step 3 Setting hear traffic NO Adjust VOL cont Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 3 Ensure That Handset Is handset headset LS YES Go to Step 4 Headset LS is Working operational NO Replace item cont Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 4 Verify Sync Time Are ANCD and RT times YES Go to Step 5 within 2 seconds NO Reload sync time cont 2 Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 5 Verify FH
255. ress ENTR to select groups 9 Press ENTR to select 1 groups selected groups desired selecting Y N 10 Respond NO when Do you want to specify a time pd through selecting to send Y N 11 Respond YES Enter Time Pd gt 12 Enter Time Period Include Suffix amp Smoke Pyro desired data Y N Send to Ancd Pc Broadcast 13 Respond YES 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS 14 Enter ANCD Do you want to save this new SOI set Y N 15 Respond YES New SOI set name gt 222222229 16 Enter SOI set name Connect ANCD to ANCD 17 Connect ANCDs and Press SEND to send press down arrow WAIT b Prepare Target ANCD for 1 Turn ANCD ON select selected SOI transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter 01 qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter RECEIVE receive from Ancd Broadcast 5 Enter ANCD Connect ANCD to ANCO n 6 Press down arrow Press RCV to receive WAIT c Perform transfer of 1 Press SEND on Processing Please wait selected SOI Source ANCD shows of bytes sent Sending of SOI data is completed 2 Press RCV on Target Processing Please wait ANCD shows number of bytes sent Receive operation was successful If you wish to transfer a complete SOI refer to Special Operator Task 2 Alternate 4f this screen appears respon
256. rmation and COMSEC keys TEK only The preferred method of updating these categories of data is by physical connection of ANCD to ANCD When the tactical situation makes physical transfer impossible or impractical these electronic transfer means may be used All SINCGARS NCS personnel should receive at least familiarization training in these tasks In units which anticipate frequent mission related requirements for electronic data transfer NCS operators should be trained to proficiency In that many units will but rarely have a need to use electronic data transfer the assistance of the Signal Offrcer NCOs may be required for their NCSs to perform these tasks correctly 6 40 Summary of Special NCS Tasks SPECIAL NCS TASK 1 SPECIAL NCS TASK 2 SPECIAL NCS TASK 3 SPECIAL NCS TASK 4 SPECIAL NCS TASK 5 Transfer Updated FH Data via Net Update ERF Used for electronic transfer of FH data hopset net ID TSK from one location to another Net update ERF may also include a change in sync time if desired Transmit SOI information Using the Broadcast Mode This Is the procedure used for electronic transfer of SOI information from one location to another Because of the time required to transfer SOI data by Broadcast each transmission is normally limited to one time period Send TEK to Other NCSs Using the MK Method of OTAR This is the principal method of electronically transferring a TEK from one location to anothe
257. s as shown Figure 4 17 below also see Special NCS Task 1 Transmit Updated FH Data Via Net Update Load new FH data into RT Alert net operators for ERF where to store it and its effective DTG Net operators set to LD and standby for ERF NCS sets FCTN to LD presses LOAD on RT enters channel where new FH data is stored NCS presses ERF on RT and returns FCTN switch to SQ ON Net operators standby note activation of SIG display press STO and channel number for storage NCS confirms net members receipt of the ERF At the time the new FH data is effective NCS makes a communications check using new FH data Figure 4 17 SENDING NET UPDATE ERF 11 5820 890 10 8 4 8c Sending SOI Information by Broadcast Method DEFINITION Broadcast is a term used for transmitting SOI information over the air from one ANCD to another using SINCGARS radios for transmission LIMITATION Because of the amount of data involved SOI normally no more than one time period of information is sent by the Broadcast method This is not a limitation of the radio but a consideration that the radio is used for other purposes DATA MODE The Broadcast method uses the 1200 bits per second data rate of the SINCGARS radio PROCEDURE The procedure for sending SOI information by Broadcast Mode is as shown Figure 4 18 lbelow also see Special NCS Task 2 Transfer SOI Information Using Broadcas
258. s change every 24 hours call signs suffixes expanders CUE frequency MAN frequency SC frequencies for channels 1 6 sign countersign Smoke and pyrotechnic signals change every 10 days Unclassified call words and their associated suffixes and expanders A five day package of SOI information is called a set a ten day package is referred to as an edition There is no requirement to periodically change sync time The only requirement is to keep radios within a net and nets within a command on the same sync time The operational requirement calls for each NCS to once daily check RT sync time against GPS time the difference is more than one second the NCS is expected to adjust the sync time in the NCS radio Sync time in net member s radios can then be updated by the NCS transmitting or merely pressing PTT several times This sync time updating procedure ensures that cross net communications are readily available to commanders and others who need them 11 5820 890 10 8 4 7e ANCD Loads and Updating ACTIVE DATA RESERVE DATA ANCD LOAD UPDATE CYCLE Three SOI editions provide a using unit thirty days of SOI information for active use One loadset provides the using unit with 30 days of COMSEC key and FH data One reserve loadset provides the using unit 30 additional days of COMSEC key and FH data Two reserve SOI editions provide SOI information good for the 30 days the active loadset is being used
259. s to Equipment Technical Publications Transportation Discrepancy Report TDR Report of Discrepancy ROD Product Quality Deficiency Report Combat Net Radio Operations Artificial Respiration Tactical Single Channel Radio Communication Techniques AN PSC 7 Radio Set Wireline Adapter Interconnect Cable CX 13310 VRC Variable Format Message Entry Device AN GSC 21 Tactical Fire Direction System AN GSC 10 Lightweight Digital Fax AN UXC 7 Secure Net Radio Interface Unit KY 90 Battery Computer System AN GYK 29 Digital Message Device AN PSG 2 FIST V Digital Message Device AN PSG 5 Maneuver Control System MCS Lightweight TACFIRE A 1 11 5820 890 10 8 5 11 5820 890 10 18 TECHNICAL MANUALS 11 5810 394 14 amp P 11 5820 890 10 6 11 5825 291 13 750 244 2 Mortar Ballistic Computer M23 MBC Loudspeaker LS 671 Operation of AN TPQ 36 Firefinder Operation of Battery Computer System to Gun Display Unit Operation of AN PSC 3 Radio Set Operation of AFATDS System AN GYG 1 U 1 2 3 amp 4 Operator s Unit Direct Support and Specialized Repair Activity Maintenance Manual with Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Automated Net Control Device SINCGARS ICOM Ground Radio Operator s Pocket Guide SINCGARS ICOM Ground Radio NCS Pocket Guide Operations and Maintenance Manual Satellite Signal Navigation Set AN PSN 11 Procedure for Destruction of Electro
260. s you plenty of time to replace the spent batteries with new ones without risk of losing your stored data If you lose your data while replacing batteries you will need to have the internal ANCD software reactivated Should you experience this situation take your ANCD to your unit maintainer for reactivation and reloading 11 5820 890 12 Operator and Unit Maintenance for AN CYZ 10 Automated Net Control Device ANCD TM 11 5810 394 14 amp P Operators Unit Direct Support and Specialized Repair Activity Maintenance Manual with Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Automated Net Control Device 8 2f Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR AN PSN 11 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE REFERENCE 8 22 The replacement of main power and hold up batteries is the primary operator requirement in PLGR maintenance TM 11 5825 291 13 Operations and Maintenance Manual Satellite Signal Navigation Set AN PSN 11 11 5820 890 10 8 8 24 Frequency Hopping Multiplexer FHMUX PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES PMCS Place the POWER toggle The POWER ON switch to the ON position indicator does not and verify POWER ON illuminate and stay indicator is illuminated illuminated OR Watch the POWER indicator and the four any of the four BIT FAULT indicators The BIT FAULT indicators POWER should illuminate does not illuminate continuously and the four then extinguish after BIT FAULT indicators should five seconds illum
261. scription offset operator over the air rekey power amplifier pamphlet personal computer packet precision lightweight GPS receiver permanent memory preventive maintenance checks and services position power supply adapter plain text plain text message being received push to talk power pyrotechnic quick reference remote control unit receive remote radio frequency report of discrepancy receiver transmitter SIP RT used as remote control unit RCU receive variable Abbreviation RWI RXMT SA 5 SDM SETDR SIG SIGO SINCGARS SIP SNAP SLPA SOP 50 SPKR SR SR D SR LR SR LR D SRM Description radio wire integration retransmission situational awareness single channel SINCGARS data mode set data rate signal signal officer single channel ground and airborne radio system system improvement program steerable null antenna processor SINCGARS low profile antenna signal operating instructions standing operating procedure squelch speaker short range short range radio with dismount kit short range long range short range long range radio with dismount kit single radio mount Abbreviation STBY STO STU SUFX SYNC TB TCP TD TDR TEK TF TMPD TRANS Description stand by store secure telephone unit suffix synchronize technical bulletin transmission control protocol time delay tran
262. se this designation with the A in RT version or other component numbers The C in radio nomenclature indicates Single Radio Mount SRM radios COMPONENTS The components which are used in all vehicular radio configurations are shown below in graphic form for ease of reference Specific components which make up each configuration are listed under each radio designation Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523 A B C D Mounting Base MB MT 6352 A part of installation kit Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 A B C D E Vehicular Antenna AS 3900 part of installation kit SINCGARS Low Profile Antenna SLPA AS 3916 part of installation kit Handset HS H 250 part of installation kit Loudspeaker LS LS 671 part of installation kit Power Amplifier PA AM 7238 A B Power Amplifier Mount PA Mt MT 6353 Cable W2 Cable W4 Control Monitor C M C 11291A part of installation kit Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 2 12 Vehicular Radio Components 11 5820 890 10 8 RECEIVER TRANSMITTER RADIO RT RT 1523 C U Serles 1 AMPLIFIER RADIO FREQUENCY PA MOUNTING VEHICULAR VAA MT 6352 VRC AM 7239 VRC Series MT 6352A VRC 3 2 AM 7238 VRC Series MOUNTING BASE 8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PA MOUNT amp MT 6353 VRC HANDSET 1 H 250 U di 2 CABLE ASSEMBLY ANTENNA VEHICULAR RADIO FREQ
263. sing it a second time shuts down the PLGR immediately NUM LOCK Pressing NUM LOCK toggles the keypad between control and numeric Number Lock modes is displayed at lower right when NUM LOCK IS 3f Control Monitor C M FRONT PANEL The front panel of the Control Monitor provides the operator four controls and five small displays for control of up to three radios Controls include FCTN function RADIO INIT initiate and DIM switches The five displays show RF power RT mode channel variable COMSEC mode and Main Standby Control 8 CONTROL MONITOR 5 22 11 5820 890 10 8 CONTROL MONITOR CONTROLS AND USES CONTROL PURPOSE RADIO This control is used to select Radio 1 2 or 3 Positions 1 and 2 are for RT A and RT B in first VAA position 3 is for RT A in second VA4 FCTN This control is used for selecting test RF power RT mode channel Function COMSEC variable COMSEC mode and main or standby status TEST Used to run C M self test Results are shown in displays Self test will continue until switch is moved out of TEST position RF Radio Frequency This control position is used to set the RF power output of the radio The INIT switch is used for adjusting power RT MODE CHAN Channel VAR Variable COMSEC CONTROL INIT Initiate DIM Used to set RT mode including power off INIT switch is used to make changes RT mo
264. smit and receive only in the REM position Radio channels may be changed COMSEC positions of PT and CT may be selected COMSEC keys may be selected by scrolling Radio data rates may be selected OPERATING RULES 11 5820 890 10 8 The following rules apply to the operation of the RCU in conjunction with a SINCGARS radio They are made necessary by the manner in which the two components work together It is important that they be followed to preclude operational problems Ensure the RCU is turned ON before setting the radio FCTN to REM otherwise data will be lost in the radio COMSEC keys in the radio cannot be cleared from the RCU only at the radio The RCU display will show OPEN whenever the connecting field wire is disconnected or cut or when the companion radio FCTN is set to other than REM If the connecting field wire is disconnected or cut the radio automatically changes FCTN to STBY When the RCU FCTN is set to STBY the radio FCTN will change to that position after about 15 seconds Radio battery life condition cannot be set from the RCU only at the radio ICOM fill of the radio cannot be done remotely only at the radio If vehicular radio uses a Control Monitor it must be disconnected before the RCU can be employed The normal operating position of RCU FCTN switch is SQ ON A FAIL 9 message resulting from self testing the normally indicates that the test was run in PT change COMSEC
265. smit on the priority channel you selected merely press PTT and RT display will show CH X and you are ready to transmit To determine the frequency of a locked in channel press STO and frequency will be shown in RT display To delete a channel from the scan sequence enter the channel number using the keypad and press CLR Scanning will resume less the deleted channel To restore a deleted channel enter channel number using the RT keypad display will show CH X and restored channel will be included in scanning sequence To stop scanning merely set CHAN from CUE to another position 11 5820 890 10 8 5 7e Jamming and Anti Jamming Actions DEFINITION Jamming is the intentional transmission of signals that interrupt your ability to transmit and receive Interference is the accidental disruption of communications by friendly sources For practical purposes the following coverage of jamming includes both situations Anti jamming includes any corrective action taken by the operator to work through intentional jamming and accidental interference IDENTIFICATION If you are being jammed you may hear strong static strange noises random noise or no noise or signals at all If you suspect you are being jammed look for one of the specific symptoms shown in the table below SC OPERATIONS Jamming anti jamming procedures for SC mode of operations are as shown in the chart below JAMMING ANTI JAMMING PROCEDURES SC MODE OF OP
266. spond to CUE Calls Primary NCS Task 5 16 17 SPECIAL NCS 5 a Definition of Special NCS Tasks 6 18 b Summary of Special NCS Tasks 6 18 c Transmit Updated FH Data via Net Update ERF Special NCS Task 1 d Transmit SOI Information Using Broadcast Mode Special NCS Task 2 Send TEK to Other NCSs Using MK Method of OTAR Special NCS Task 3 f Send to Net Operators Using AK Method of OTAR Special NCS Task 4 Receive and Store TEK Sent by MK Method of OTAR Special NCS Task 5 11 5820 890 10 8 6 1 GENERAL CONTROL TASK DIVISION TRAINING MATERIALS The SINCGARS radio employs keys and variables to provide secure frequency hopping communications The big advantage is that the enemy cannot read your traffic cannot locate your position through direction finding and has great difficulty in trying to jam your communications Control is the price to be paid for these advantages Each radio in a net must have the same COMSEC keys FH data and sync time in order to communicate It is the Net Control Station that provides the required degree of control NCS tasks are divided into two groups primary and special Primary tasks are those that NCS personnel may be called upon
267. sportation discrepancy report traffic encryption key tacfire of task force technical manual time period transmission Abbreviation TSK TST UD UTIL VAA VAR VEH VHF VIC VOL WHSP WP XMIT YY TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Description transmission security key test update utility vehicular amplifier adapter variable vehicular very high frequency vehicular intercom set volume whisper way point transmit years zero 11 5820 890 10 8 GLOSSARY TERM Alternate net control station Automated net control device Battery life indicator Broadcast Channel Cold start net opening COMSEC keys CUE channel frequency Electronic counter countermeasures Electronic remote fill ERF Enhanced data modes External used with GRM 122 DEFINITION Net member operators designated by the NCS to complete net openings respond to CUE calls displace after using SC mode if appropriate and take over for NCS when requested Hand held computer used for loading RT with COMSEC FH data and sync time also replace paper 501 Number read from manpack RT display providing an estimate of battery power used and remaining Method of transmitting SOI information from one ANCD to another using SINCGARS data mode RT switch positions in which COMSEC keys and FH data or single channel frequencies may be loaded stored and used Method of opening a FH net in which each m
268. ssing cable or field wire Check for proper installation of cable and field wire Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cable or field wire Check for presence of RCU main battery Check vehicle power availability Move COMSEC from Z to PT properly adjust DIM move FCTN from OFF to Z FH and check that RCU display lights With RCU FCTN in Z FH check that RCU display shows GOOD Move RCU COMSEC to CT and check that alarm will clear Move RCU FCTN to TST and check that RCU display shows GOOD at end Cable or field wire is missing Cable or field wire is damaged and cannot be used Main battery is missing cannot be replaced No vehicle power cannot be corrected RCU display does not light RT display does not show GOOD COMSEC alarm will not clear Self test ends with other than GOOD 11 5820 890 10 8 Operator Not Fully Mission Check Service Procedure Capable If Before KEYPAD With RCU set to CT SC LD and Numbers 0 9 channel shown a Press FREQ CLR Any test frequency and enter 0 9 cannot be CUE 31000 entered MAN 32000 CHAN 1 43000 CHAN 2 54000 CHAN 3 65000 CHAN 4 76000 CHAN 5 87000 CHAN 6 87975 Press STO for each entry Any test frequency 0 9 cannot be stored DATA LOADING SC Frequencies Load SC frequencies SC frequency will COMSEC Keys load in RCU Load COMSE
269. t ANCD to RT and press down arrow Set FCTN switch to LD on RT 7 Ensure FCTN is at LD and press down arrow Do you want to include time Y N 8 Enter YES Press LOAD on RT c Perform ICOM fill on RT 1 Press LOAD button on RT keypad and observe Transfer in progress 2 Note completion of ICOM fill data transfer ICOM transfer successful 4 3 Load sync time manually if required to do so RT cannot accept time from ANCD DATA control is found on the same key as the numeral 4 Select to Remote Control Unit with COMSEC keys The procedure is the same as that shown for ICOM radio fill but only COMSEC is loaded not FH data RCU does not require FH data NCS or unit SOP for exact policy to follow RAKE appear radio Sync time is normally included for net opening only not for net updates Consult your If the RT being used willnot accept sync time as a part of the ICOM fill this message will When it does the operator must then manually load Julian Date and sync time into the 5 33 11 5820 890 10 8 5 44 Perform Hot Start Net Opening Primary Operator Task 3 DESCRIPTION This task is required when the net has been down for any reason and is now to become operational at a prescribed time This procedure may also be used when an individual operator has been out of the net for any reason and wis
270. t Mode for detailed procedure Set NCS RT to SQ ON CT FH M and DATA to 1200 Prepare ANCD for Broadcast select SOI data to be sent enter Broadcast IDs of stations to be polled and new SOI et name Connect ANCD to AUD DATA RT connector and handset to AUD FILL connector Alert net operators to Standby for Broadcast go to SQ ON FH CT and DATA at 1200 Direct net operators to turn ANCD ON enter SOI Receive Broadcast station ID connect ANCD to AUD DATA connector of RT and standby NCS presses SEND on ANCD net operators press RCV on ANCD SOI data is transmitted Figure 4 18 SENDING SOI BY BROADCAST SPECIAL FEATURE Up to 16 stations may be polled during use of the Broadcast method All stations receive the transmission but the NCS may select by identity code those stations to be polled At the end of the first transmission the ANCD determines which stations did not receive the SOI data and rebroadcasts After the third broadcast to polled stations the ANCD reports to the sending NCS any stations which still have not received the SOI data If the NCS does not desire to use this polling feature it can be shut off by entering 0 4 27 11 5820 890 10 8 4 9 RETRANSMISSION RXMT OPERATIONS 49a General BUILT IN CAPABILITY CAPABILITY MODES RXMT SITUATION The SINCGARS radio has a built in retransmission capability which requires only two radios and the addition of an RXMT cable
271. t equipped with SIP features Components are identified as RT 1523 RT 1523A RT 1523B and AM 7239 AM 7239A AM 72398 FBCB2 Hardware FBCB2 Software Frequency hopping FH data FH Master Holding memory Hot start net opening Internet Intranet replay Line of sight LOS Loadset TM 11 5820 890 10 8 DEFINITION A term that refers to the various forms of computers used in vehicular radio configurations for data communications during army digitization experiments FBCB2 computers range from commercial off the shelve items to fully militarized computers The interface from FBCB2 computers to the SINCGARS SIP ASIP radio system is via an RS 232 port of the computer to the SIP ASIP VAA J6 connector UNIX based software developed especially for support of Task Force operations and used in FBCB2 hardware FBCB2 software when employed with the SIP ASIP RT and SIP ASIP VAA provides situational awareness reporting internet operations and SINCGARS to EPLRS automatic interface The host interface to the SINCGARS SIP ASIP radio system uses the commercial TCP IP family of communications protocols specified in the Army Technical Architecture ATA Hopset lockouts if used TSK net ID and sync time required for FH communications Mode position used by the NCS in which the NCS RT helps maintain sync time in all net radios RT temporary memory used for loading retrieving and sending fill data Method of opening
272. t line of the 5 VDC power supply 24 VDC is the input voltage PRINTED NAME GRADE OR TITLE AND TELEPHONE NUMBER 999 1776 PREVIOUS EDITIONS PS IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOWABOUT YO ARE OBSOLETE RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS REVERSE OF DA FORM 2028 2 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY inen C AA ES US MAIL OFFICIAL BUSINESS U S Army ATTN AMS WM LT Fo mouth Jersey 07703 5007 EEEE 93400 SNOW E E T RECOMMENDED CHANGES EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS SOMETHING WRONG wm THis PuBLicaTion FROM PRINT YOUR UNIT S COMPLETE ADDRESS THEN JOT DOWN THE n DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM CAREFULLY TEAR IT OUT FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN DATE SE THE MAIL Ne PUBLICATION NUMBER PUBLICATION DATE PUBLICATION TITLE OPERATOR S MANUAL SINCGARS TM 11 5820 890 10 8 1 December 1998 GROUND COMBAT NET RADIO ICOM IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT DOTTED eee eee eee ewe PRINTED GRADE TITLE AND TELEPHONE NUMBER SIGN HERE FORM PREVIOUS EDITIONS PS IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR DA 1 JUL 7 202 8 2 ARE OBSOLETE RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS REVERSE DA FORM 2028 2 FILL IN YOUR UNIT S ADDRESS FOLD BACK DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY SS Ed U S MAIL OFFICIAL BUSINESS U S Army CEC
273. t of ERF to use MAN in CT for ACK e Make communications 1 Direct operators to go to Net shifts to the FH mode of check SQ ON operational chan communications 2 Set NCS radio to SQ ON N A and operational chan 3 Check communications Note which operators do not with net operators respond 4 Direct Alt NCS to bring Cold Start is complete when all all other operators into operators have entered net net Sync time may be loaded into the radio from an ANCD a PLGR via or by use of the RT keypad The preferred method is to load exact GPS time and Julian Date directly form an ANCD or PLGR Depending upon operational conditions and state of operator training you may wish to have operators acknowledge this announcement Ensure that operators understand that if they fail for any reason to enter the net at the time the ERF is sent they are to standby on MAN and wait for you to contact them there 6 3 Respond to CUE Calls Primary NCS Task 5 DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART SUBTASKS a Note CUE message in RT 1 display 2 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 An important feature of the SINCGARS radio is its ability to be contacted by a non frequency hopping radio or an FH radio lacking data or sync time through a process known as CUEing All that is required is for the calling radio to be on the prescribed CUE frequency press the push to talk switch and wait for a response This action causes a
274. te and exact GPS Zulu time directly from the PLGR Manually Load PLGR Date and Zulu Time Into ANCD This task enables the NCS or operator having a PLGR to manually load Julian Date and GPS Zulu time into an ANCD Load PLGR Date and GPS Zulu Time Into SINCGARS RT This task permits an NCS or SINCGARS operator to electronically transfer Julian Date and GPS Zulu time directly from the PLGR to the SINCGARS radio by physical connection Load PLGR Key From ANCD Into PLGR This PLGR task allows an NCS or SINCGARS operator to load a key from an ANCD into a PLGR whenever required 11 5820 890 10 8 7 2 Obtain Date and GPS Zulu Time From PLGR PLGR Task 1 DESCRIPTION This task enables the SINCGARS NCS or operator to determine Julian Date and GPS Zulu time directly from the PLGR DETAILED FLOWCHART OBTAIN DATE AND GPS ZULU TIME FROM PLGR SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Place PLGR into operation 1 Press PLGR ON key N A 2 Observe PLGR perform No action required of NCS or self test operator b Select proper screen and At end of self test note FIX TFOM this screen 18T WK 82223e EL 00027m note this screen 25 12 94 SUN Speed too slow GS lt 1 mph f P C Read date and time from Read date as PLGR screen 25 12 94 2 Read time as 2124 PLGR Task 1 is completed hours and 43 sec Zulu Press down arrow on PLGR 2124 43Z TFOM 4 In this section PLGR screens are shown in double lined boxes
275. the receiving NCS can then distribute the new TEK to net operators by passing the ANCD through the unit The AK OTAR method transmits the new TEK from the NCS radio directly into the target operators radios An advantage of the AK method is that the receiving operator is required to take no action at all A disadvantage is that the TEK and KEK in the receiving radios are changed immediately while the sending NCS must reload that radio with the new TEK and an updated KEK This procedure involves some risk of losing communications at least in secure mode To send a new TEK to other NCSs by using the MK OTAR process the sending NCS operator follows the steps shown in Figure 4 14 below also see Special NCS Task 3 Send TEK to Other NCSs Using MK Method of OTAR for detailed procedures Prepare radio to send MK OTAR FCTN to SQ ON MODE to FH M COMSEC to CT and DATA to OFF Load receiving stations KEK into NCS radios channel 6 Prepare ANCD to send MK OTAR turn ANCD ON enter Radio Comsec MK select TEK Connect ANCD to NCS using fill cable Direct target NCSs to standby make special NCS task 5 preparations and ACK when ready for MK OTAR Direct target NCSs to set RT to chan 6 press RCV Set NCS RT to channel 6 and press SEND Return to operational channei After 30 seconds announce OTAR complete TEK ID is xxxxx effective DTG is xxxx and obtain ACK Reload KEK in NCS radio MK OTAR is complete
276. thod works experience has shown that coordination requirements and operator actions make it a more demanding process than the Hot Start method It is available for use whenever an NCS needs to bring all operators into the net at the exact same time DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART CONDUCT COLD START NET OPENING SUBTASKS ACTIONS a Prepare NCS radio for Load CUE MAN and SC Cold Start net opening fregs as required RESULTS Perform Primary Operator Task 1 b Prepare net operators for Cold Start net opening c Send ERF at announced net opening time Load COMSEC keys FH data and sync time Ensure all operator RTs are properly loaded Perform Primary Operator Task 2 Operators perform an ICOM fill less sync time 2 Advise operators when 1 the net is to be opened Alert net that ERF is to be sent at this time Operators must be standing by at exact net opening time Helps operators note when ERF is received 2 Press LOAD on RT RT display shows Get data from what chan 3 4 Enter channel in which ERF data is stored Press ERF on RT RT display shows HF XXX blinks and beeps RT display shows SEND 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS d Confirm receipt of ERF 1 Allow operators time to 20 30 seconds should be store the ERF adequate 2 Direct operators to ACK NCS and operators continue receip
277. tion From ANCD to ANCD Via STU This task permits an NCS or communications specialist to transmit classified SOI information from an ANCD at one location to an ANCD at another location by telephone Receive SOI Information Into An ANCD Via STU This task allows an NCS or communications specialist to receive and store in an ANCD that classified SOI information sent from one location to another by telephone 11 5820 890 10 8 7 3 Send COMSEC Keys FH Data From ANCD to ANCD via STU STU Task 1 DESCRIPTION This task allow an NCS or communications specialist to send classified COMSEC keys TEK and KEK and FH data hopsets TSK Net IDs from an ANCD at one location to one at another location regardless of distance via commercial or military telephone circuits DETAILED FLOWCHARTS SEND COMSEC KEYS FH DATA FROM ANCD TO ANCD VIA STU SUBTASKS ACTIONS eee a as Goordinatsc itane by transfer by 1 receiver STU Coordinate transfer Proper STU keys 2400 BPS preparations PT CT voice checked b Prepare ANCD for STU 1 Turn ANCD ON select transfer Soi Radio Supervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup COMSEC Time 3 Enter SEND send to Radio Ancd Stu Pc 4 Enter STU Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod 5 Enter Loadset Database System high is or Eset as desired U C S TS 4 Select data to send 1 Press 1 then PgUp select Loadset example PgDN
278. to CT and re run the test If FAIL 9 appears after running test in CT see unit maintenance 4 39 11 5820 890 10 8 4 116 Use of RT as DESCRIPTION REMOTED RADIO RCU RT SELECTION ORDERWIRE COMSEC APPLICATION 4 40 The SIP ASIP RT can be used as a Remote Control Unit RCU replacing the C 11561 RCU When used as an RCU the SIP ASIP RT accommodates both Enhanced and SINCGARS Data Modes the C 11561 RCU is used with the SIP radio only the SINCGARS Data Modes SDM may be used Otherwise operation of the SIP RT when used as an RCU is identical to procedures used with RCU C 11561 The FCTN switch of the remoted radio is set to REM which disables the front panel of that RT because control is exercised from the RCU RT The remoted radio defaults to CT when placed in REM mode The of the RCU RT is set to SQ ON The feature of the SIP ASIP radio is selected by pressing RCU on the RT keypad and then pressing CHG until RCU appears in the display By placing the RCU RT FCTN switch in the REM position the RCU RT operator can talk with the remoted radio operator over the non secure two wire connection This two wire connection is also called an orderwire As with the C 11561 RCU orderwire voice communications over the two wire connection between RCU and remoted RT are plain text not encrypted The SIP ASIP RT can be used as an RCU in all data mo
279. to PLGR PLGR Task 4 DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART This procedure enables an NCS or PLGR operator to transfer a PLGR key from the ANCD to the PLGR when required LOAD PLGR KEY FROM ANCD INTO PLGR SUBTASKS a Prepare PLGR for loading key ACTIONS RESULTS 1 Turn PLGR ON N A 2 Observe PLGR perform its N A self test 3 Note when this screen FIX FOM 5 appears 18Y MGRS New WK 82223e 63528n 4 Connect W4 to PLGR but not to ANCD yet b Prepare ANCD for loading PLGR key 1 Turn ANCD ON 2 Enter RADIO 3 Enter COMSEC 4 Enter LD Enter TEK press PgDN and ENTR to select Press PgUP PgDN to view ENTR to select 7 Enter QUIT EL 00027m P N A select Soi Radio supervisor Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time vG Ld Rv Ak Mk vU select Tek Kek Select key qUit name number Select key quit PLGR key name XMT Connect ANCD to RT WAIT 4 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS actions RESULTS c Transfer PLGR key from 1 Press Do not connect Press LOAD on RT ANCD to PLGR ANCD to RT Now connect W4 to ANCD 2 Now connect W4 to ANCD Key loaded Key loaded Do not connect W4 to ANCD until directed to do so by the ACTIONS column Sequence of task requires that you connect W4 to PLGR then select key to be transferred and then connect W4 to ANCD When you connect to W4 to the
280. to perform at any time The second category special includes tasks that may or may not be performed depending upon command policy tactical situation and state of training As with the job of the SINCGARS operator the job of the NCS has also been simplified by the statement of task procedures in clear easy to follow steps And like the operator the NCS is provided a small pocket guide containing abbreviated task procedures for all operator requirements plus primary NCS tasks This pocket guide serves as a memory jogger for the trained NCS operator precluding any need to memorize any aspect of SINCGARS radio operation 11 5820 890 10 8 6 2 NCS RESPONSIBILITIES NET OPENING ANCD ASSEMBLY It is the NCS who is responsible for opening the secure frequency hopping SINCGARS net Net opening time is announced in advance to enable operators to make proper preparations The NCS ensures that the net is up and fully operational in time to support unit mission communications requirements As the principal supervisor of the net the NCS ensures that all net operators have ready access to a fully loaded ANCD containing the prescribed COMSEC keys FH data hopset TSK and net IDS and GPS based sync time to support net opening preparations NCS personnel are expected to properly assemble their own manpack radios and install their own required vehicular radio components in preparation for net opening This includes connecting cab
281. ture Cross Reference List Abbreviations and Glossary NOMENCLATURE CROSS REFERENCE LIST COMMON NAME Battery HUB Battery main power Battery box Battery tray Cable set FHMUX Control monitor Dismount radio FHMUX Field pack Fill device Handset HRCRD Loudspeaker Manpack antenna Manpack radio Mounting base Power amplifier Power amplifier mount Radio Remote control unit Single radio mount Vehicular amplifier adapter Vehicular antenna Vehicular radio VIC system Wire line adapter OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE Battery Non rechargeable BA 5372 U Battery BA 5590 U Lithium Battery Box CY 8523 A B PRC Tray Battery CY 8664 VRC Cable Assembly Set Electrical Equipment CX 13436 VRC Control Monitor C 11291 A VRC AN VRC 88A 91A Multiplexer Frequency Hopping TD 1456 VRC Carrying Case Radio Automated Net Control Device AN CYZ 10 Handset H 250 U Handheld Remote Control Radio Device C 12493 U Loudspeaker LS 671 VRC or LS 685 U Antenna Manpack AS 3683 PRC or AS 4266 PRC AN PRC 119A Mounting Base MT 6352 A VRC Amplifier Radio Frequency AM 7238 A B VRG Mounting Base MT 6353 VRC Receiver Transmitter RT 1523 A B C D E C U Control Receiver Transmitter RCU C 11561 C U Mounting Base MT 6576 VRC Amplifier Adapter Vehicular AM 7239 A B C D E VRC Antenna Vehicular AS 3900 VRC or AS 3916 VRC AN VRC 874AD F 87 88A D F 89A D F 90A D F 91A D F 92A D F intercommunications S
282. u may both create and read memos Memo qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Memo 1 2 3 4 5 41 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5 SPECIAL OPERATOR TASKS 5 5a Definition of Special Operator Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT INVOLVED SPECIAL OPERATOR TASKS SIP ASIP WHAT 5 REQUIRED 5 42 There are eight tasks categorized as special for the SINCGARS ANCD operator They are special in that they may be performed by specially trained operators or they may be the responsibility of communications specialists NCSs or designated NCOs These eight tasks are normally not required of the SINCGARS ANCD operator to meet routine communications requirements when the unit is in an operational situation Some operators may be required to perform some of these special tasks while other unit operators will not be These special tasks involve functions that are required only occasionally by selected stations An example is the commander s driver who may be called upon to transfer data from one ANCD to another The commander s driver might also be required to change net IDs Also unit scouts may be required to perform retransmission operations In addition to the eight special operator tasks there are two Special SIP ASIP Operator Tasks These special SIP ASIP tasks are use the SIP ASIP RT as an RCU and send data from one computer to another over a SINCGARS secure frequency hopping
283. unicate with nets you do not have loaded in your radio having the same sync time is a big advantage Global Positioning System GPS satellites offer SINCGARS users very precise time by use of the Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR When all FH nets are opened using precise GPS time and when sync time of the NCS radio is checked against GPS time daily all nets within a division or larger force are accessible by merely changing to the proper net ID With GPS time readily available to all SINCGARS NCSs and operators there is no reason to use other than GPS time for SINCGARS sync time Zulu time is commonly used for military message dating to provide a common basis of time around the world Zulu time is used as basic SINCGARS sync time to ensure that all nets are using the same time especially important when operating near a time zone boundary The PLGR provides both local and Zulu time either may be selected and read or transferred directly from the device to this manual provides a time zone map with Zulu time highlighted For example when Zulu time is 2400 hours local time in New York is 1900 and in California it is 1600 4 11 11 5820 890 10 8 4 44 Cross Net Communications ONE NET ONLY FH POSITION RT CLOCKS COMMANDERS MONITORING Unless there is but a single FH net operating a totally unrealistic battlefield situation there is great advantage from the use of common sync time The NCS
284. ure will be used frequently Receive Net Update ERF from NCS This task is performed when an NCS needs to update some element of FH data including sync time using electronic transfer means The normal method of FH data updating is by physical connection of one ANCD to another ERF update provides a back up procedure for those occasions when electronic transfer is required by the tactical situation of the unit Perform CUE and ERF Method of Late Net Entry This task is performed when sync time in the RT becomes for any reason more than one minute different from that of the operational net Use of the CUE and ERF method is discouraged because it requires single channel communication and special action on the part of the receiving NCS The Hot Start procedure works equally well and it does not involve SC mode or NCS action For RT 1523A B versions sync time difference cannot exceed 100 days for the RT 1523 version difference cannot exceed 60 minutes Conduct Retransmission RXMT Operations Performance of this task is required when one or more stations of a net become out of normal SINCGARS operating range or an obstacle blocks line of sight communications This is a task that unit scouts staff vehicle drivers and communications specialists should be able to perform on short notice The RXMT capability of the SINCGARS radio is of significant value in various operational situations 5 43 11 5820 890 10 8 DATA
285. x Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 5 Say Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 6 Say Enter RECEIVE receive from Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 7 Say Enter BROADCAST Enter broadcast ID 1 16 gt 6 22 SUBTASKS d Send SOI information by Broadcast Mode ACTIONS 8 Say Enter SOP broadcast ID and press ENTR 9 Say Press down arrow 10 Say Connect ANCD to RT AUD DATA HS to Aud Fill 11 Say When ready press down arrow and ACK 1 Say Standby broadcast will now be sent press RCV now sending now 2 Press SEND on NCS ANCD TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RESULTS BROADCAST ID set to X Polling ON OFF Connect ANCD to RT AUD DATA Emphasize AUD DATA for ANCD connection Press RCV to receive WAIT Alerts operators that broadcast is about to be sent coordinates pressing of SEND and RCV Processing Please wait Sending of SOI data completed If polling is used the NCS ANCD will indicate which stations did and did not receive the broadcast If polling is not used the NCS should have net members acknowledge receipt of SO data Do not press SEND until net members are ready at your direction to press RCV Then press SEND within 20 seconds of having operators press RC V 6 23 11 5820 890 10 8 6 4e Send to Other NCSs Using MK Method of Special NCS Task 3 DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART This procedure allows an NCS to trans
286. y procedures 5 Sending TEK by AK method of OTAR Sending by MK method of s 6 24 Receiving sent by MK method of OTAR e e 6 29 Passive method of late net entry s 6 4 18 Perform Cold Start net opening task 4 5 51 Perform CUE and Electronic Remote Fill late net entry method task 5 55 Pet form Hot Start net opening task 1 5 34 Perform Passive Late Net Entry method task 5 36 Periodic updating e e e 4 22 Of Communications Security COMSEO keys 6 22 4 22 Of Frequency Hopping FH data e Of Signal Operating Instructions SOI information 4 22 Precise Global Positioning System GPS time 4 11 Index 4 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver Capabilities m Pcr Characteristics aua esce dac ma xs d dae d Main power HUB requirements Operator maintenance Physicalddid wees betwee ene rrt Tasks SUMMAN ess swa Deui Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS
287. y FH data loads Sending if required and Logging members into the net during opening A SINCGARS secure FH net will be opened prior to the start of an operation while the unit is still at home station or in an assembly area It is highly unlikely the net once operational will ever be completely shut down until the exercise or operation has been completed In combat situations it would be rare for an entire net to shut down The minimum essential data required by a SINCGARS radio prior to net opening are COMSEC key and TSK These data elements must be manually loaded into the radio even when an is to be sent Maximum data that can be loaded into the radio prior to net opening include COMSEC key FH data and sync time In this case the radio is ready to enter the secure FH net at the opening time or when called Loadset is defined as all of the COMSEC keys and and FH data hopset TSK and net ID required to load all six channels of the SINCGARS radio Loadsets are tailored to the needs of each net or unit specifying by channel where the operational net will be and what other nets will be loaded into the remaining channels For examples of company and platoon loadsets sed Figures 4 5 and 4 6 below Unit loadset composition may be left to the discretion of each operator but it is normally prescribed by the unit SOP to ensure that all operators have the same information and can r
288. y channel If for example it is necessary to communicate with elements of a different division you would load their TEK into the channel you intend to use for that purpose In order to communicate in secure CT mode both the transmitting and receiving radios must be using the same TEK When using more than one TEK in your radio it is important to record which channel each TEK is stored in The SINCGARS radio offers the operator the ability to move TEKs from channel to channel The process is called scrolling and it is easy to per form For detailed procedures sed Figure 4 1 below Set CHAN switch to 1 5 cannot scroll in chan 6 where different TEK is needed Press CMSC button display shows TEK 1 TEK 2 etc Press CHG button until TEK desired appears in display Different TEK is now ready for use in channel selected To return to original TEK repeat steps 2 and 3 or move the CHAN switch out of and back into the operational channel Figure 4 1 HOW TO SCROLL TEK The purpose of using secure CT communications is to prevent the enemy from intercepting friendly traffic Army policy calls for the use of CT mode whenever the capability is available With the built in COMSEC feature of SINCGARS ICOM radios ease with which all RT channels can be loaded with TEKs and the practice of using common throughout a division area makes secure communication quite easy to perform 11 5820 890 1
289. you are specifically trained to perform this task Serious database errors can occur if incorrect procedures are used At this point select the Eset you wish to replace Atthis point select your replacement Eset by name 11 5820 890 10 8 6 39 Transfer Selected SOI Information ANCD to ANCD Primary NCS Task 2 DESCRIPTION Although Primary Operator Tasks 2 and 2 Alternate provide for the transfer of full or quick reference SOI Information an NCS may at times need to transfer only selected items of SOI information For example it may be necessary to transfer only one SOI set 5 days of information the detailed procedure shown below uses an SOI set for the example Steps to be taken are the same for other categories of SOI information This task involves preparing the Source and Target ANCD plus performing the data transfer DETAILED FLOWCHARTS TRANSFER SELECTED SOI INFORMATION ANCD ANCD SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare Source ANCD for 1 Turn ANCD ON select selected SOI transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter 01 qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter SEND Scroll 1 T amp press ENTR to select SOI 5 Press down arrow SOI Set name nr Edn name tp 6 Press ENTR to select Do you want to transfer SOI and edition desired QREF Y N 7 Respond NO Do you want to specify groups to send Y N 8 Respond YES Scroll 7 amp p

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Vigo VG3019CK1 Use and Care Manual  Manual del usuario  Datalogger Portatile Manuale Utente rev.2_IT  Catalogue 11.5MB  1. seaLandings User Manual  2013年7月号（PDFファイル:9.5MB）  Bedienungsanleitung Deutsch  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file